[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2010098495A1 - Imidazolylpyrazine derivatives - Google Patents

Imidazolylpyrazine derivatives Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2010098495A1
WO2010098495A1 PCT/JP2010/053378 JP2010053378W WO2010098495A1 WO 2010098495 A1 WO2010098495 A1 WO 2010098495A1 JP 2010053378 W JP2010053378 W JP 2010053378W WO 2010098495 A1 WO2010098495 A1 WO 2010098495A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
compound
reaction
ester
acceptable salt
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/JP2010/053378
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Daiju Hasegawa
Noritaka Kitazawa
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Eisai R&D Management Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Eisai R&D Management Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Eisai R&D Management Co Ltd filed Critical Eisai R&D Management Co Ltd
Publication of WO2010098495A1 publication Critical patent/WO2010098495A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/02Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D471/04Ortho-condensed systems
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a pharmaceutical, more particularly, to a polycyclic imidazolylpyrazine derivative effective for the treatment of a neurodegenerative disease caused by amyloid- ⁇ (hereinafter referred to as A ⁇ ) such as Alzheimer's disease or Down's syndrome and a medicine, in particular, a medicine for the treatment of a disease caused by A ⁇ comprising the compound as an active ingredient.
  • a ⁇ amyloid- ⁇
  • Alzheimer's disease is a disease characterized by degeneration and loss of neurons as well as formation of senile plaques and neurofibrillary degeneration.
  • a symptom improving agent typified by an acetylcholinesterase inhibitor
  • a fundamental remedy to inhibit progression of the disease has not yet been developed. It is necessary to develop a method for controlling the cause of the onset of pathology in order to create a fundamental remedy for Alzheimer's disease.
  • a ⁇ -proteins as metabolites of amyloid precursor proteins are highly involved in degeneration and loss of neurons and onset of symptoms of dementia (see NON-PATENT DOCUMENTS 1 and 2, for example).
  • Main molecular species of A ⁇ -protein are A ⁇ 40 consisting of 40 amino acids and A ⁇ 42 with two amino acids added at the C-terminal.
  • the A ⁇ 40 and A ⁇ 42 are known to have high aggregability (see NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 3, for example) and to be main components of senile plaques (see NON-PATENT DOCUMENTS 3, 4 and 5, for example).
  • a ⁇ 40 and A ⁇ 42 are increased by mutation in APP and presenilin genes which is observed in familial Alzheimer's disease (see NON-PATENT DOCUMENTS 6, 7 and 8, for example). Accordingly, a compound that reduces the production of A ⁇ 40 and A ⁇ 42 is expected as a progression inhibitor or prophylactic agent for Alzheimer's disease.
  • a ⁇ is produced by cleaving APP by ⁇ -secretase and subsequently by ⁇ -secretase.
  • Nonpeptidic compounds are, for example, MRK-560 (see NON-PATENT DOCUMENTS 16 and 17) and compounds having a plurality of aromatic rings as disclosed in PATENT DOCUMENTS 1 and 2.
  • the compound represented by the formula (VI) as disclosed in page 17 of the specification differs from the compound of the present invention in that the compound is limited to a compound having a 2-aminothiazolyl group as a main structure.
  • the compound represented by the formula (I) as disclosed in page 6 of the specification of PATENT DOCUMENT 2 differs from the compound of the present invention in that the former compound does not have pyrazine ring in the partial structure defined as A ⁇ 2.
  • PATENT DOCUMENT 1 WO 2004/110350
  • PATENT DOCUMENT 2 WO 2007/102580
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 1 Klein WL, and seven others, Alzheimer's disease-affected brain:
  • ADDLs oligomeric A ⁇ ligands
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 2 Nitsch RM, and sixteen others, Antibodies against ⁇ -amyloid slow cognitive decline in Alzheimer's disease, Neuron, 2003, May 22; 38, p. 547-554.
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 3 Jarrett JT, and two others, The carboxy terminus of the ⁇ amyloid PROTEIN is critical for the seeding of amyloid formation: Implications for the pathogenesis of Alzheimers 1 disease, Biochemistry, 1993, 32 (18), p. 4693-4697.
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 4 Glenner GG 1 and one other, Alzheimer's disease: initial report of the purification and characterization of a novel cerebrovascular amyloid protein, Biochemical and Biophysical Research Communications, 1984, May 16, 120 (3), p. 885-890.
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 5 Masters CL, and five others, Amyloid plaque core protein in Alzheimer disease and Down syndrome, Proceeding of the National Academy of Science USA, 1985, Jun, 82 (12), p. 4245-4249.
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 6 Gouras GK, and eleven others, Intraneural A ⁇ 42 accumulation in human brain, American Journal of Pathology, 2000, Jan, 156 (1), p. 15-20.
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 7 Scheuner D, and twenty others, Secreted amyloid ⁇ -protein similar to that in the senile plaques of Alzheimer's disease is increased in vivo by the presenilin 1 and 2 and APP mutations linked to familial Alzheimer's disease, Nature Medicine, 1996, Aug, 2 (8), p. 864-870.
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 8 Forman MS, and four others, Differential effects of the Swedish mutant amyloid precursor protein on ⁇ -amyloid accumulation and secretion in neurons and nonneuronal cells, The Journal of Biological Chemistry, 1997, Dec, 19, 272 (51), p. 32247- 32253.
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 9 Shearman MS, and nine others, L-685, 458, an Aspartyl Protease Transition State Mimic, Is a Potent Inhibitor of Amyloid ⁇ -Protein Precursor ⁇ - Secretase Activity, Biochemistry, 2000, Aug, 1 , 39 (30), p. 8698-8704.
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 10 Shearman MS, and six others, Catalytic Site-Directed ⁇ - Secretase Complex Inhibitors Do Not Discriminate Pharmacologically between Notch S3 and ⁇ - APP Clevages, Biochemistry, 2003, Jun, 24, 42 (24), p. 7580-7586.
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 11 Lanz TA, and three others, Studies of A ⁇ pharmacodynamics in the brain, cerebrospinal fluid, and plasma in young (plaque-free) Tg2576 mice using the ⁇ - secretase inhibitor N2-[(2S)-2-(3,5-difluorophenyl)-2-hydroxyethanoyl]-Nl-[(7S)-5-methyl-6- oxo-6,7-dihydro-5H-dibenzo[b,d]azepin-7-yl]-L-alaninamide (LY-411575), The Journal of Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics, 2004, Apr, 309 (1), p. 49-55.
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 12 Wong GT, and twelve others, Chronic treatment with the ⁇ - secretase inhibitor LY-411, 575 inhibits ⁇ -amyloid peptide production and alters lymphopoiesis and intestinal cell differentiation, The Journal of Biological Chemistry, 2004, Mar, 26, 279 (13), p. 12876-12882.
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 13 Gitter BD, and ten others, Stereoselective inhibition of amyloid beta peptide secretion by LY450139, a novel functional gamma secretase inhibitor, Neurology of Aging 2004, 25, sup2, p. 571.
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 14 Lanz TA, and eighteen others, Concentration-dependent modulation of amyloid- ⁇ in vivo and in vitro using the ⁇ -secretase inhibitor, LY-450139, The Journal of Pharmacology and Experimantal Therapeutics, 2006, Nov, 319 (2) p. 924-933.
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 15 Siemers ER, and thirteen others, Effects of a ⁇ -secretase inhibitor in a randamized study of patients with Alzheimer disease, Neurology, 2006, 66, p. 602- 604.
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 16 Best JD, and nine others, In vivo characterization of A ⁇ (40) changes in brain and cerebrospinal fluid using the novel ⁇ -secretase inhibitor N-[cis-4-[(4- chlorophenyl)sulfonyl]-4-(2,5-difluorophenyl)cyclohexyl]- 1 ,1,1 -trifiuoromethanesulphonlamide (MK-560) in the rat, The Journal of Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics, 2006, May 317 (2) p. 786-790.
  • NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 17 Best JD, and thirteen others
  • the novel ⁇ -secretase inhibitor N- [cis-4-[(4-chlorophenyl)sulfonyl]-4-(2,5-difluorophenyl)cyclohexyl]- 1 ,1,1- trifluoromethanesulphonlamide (MK-560) reduces amylid plaque deposition without evidence notch-related pathology in the Tg2576 mouse, The Journal of Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics, 2007, Feb, 320 (2) p. 552-558.
  • a compound that inhibits the production of A ⁇ 40 and A ⁇ 42 from APP has been expected as a therapeutic or prophylactic agent for a disease caused by A ⁇ which is typified by Alzheimer's disease.
  • a nonpeptidic compound having high efficacy which inhibits the production of A ⁇ 40 and A ⁇ 42 has not yet been known.
  • the present invention relates to the following 1) to 20):
  • Rj and R 2 are the same or different and each represent a substituent selected from the following Substituent Group al ; m represents an integer of 0 to 3; n represents an integer of 0 to 2; X 1 represents i) a single bond, ii) [0010]
  • X 2 represents i) a single bond, ii) a Cl -6 alkylene group or iii) -X 3 - (wherein X 3 represents -NR 5 - , -O-, -C(O)-, -S-, -S(O)- or -S(O) 2 - and R 5 represents a hydrogen atom, a C 1-6 alkyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C2-6 alkanoyl group or a C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group);
  • Ring A represents i) a f ⁇ ve-membered aromatic heterocyclic group or ii) a five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group fused with a 5- to 14-membered non-aromatic ring group, which contains two or more nitrogen atoms and may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the following Substituent Group bl (wherein the non-aromatic ring group may have a crosslinked structure or a spiro ring system); and
  • Ring B represents a monocyclic or fused cyclic aromatic ring group selected from the group consisting of the formulas [2] to [19]: [0012]
  • each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the following Substituent Group cl, Substituent Group al: a Cl-6 alkyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C2-6 alkenyl group, a Cl-6 alkoxy group, a C2-6 alkenyloxy group, a C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group, an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group or Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 Cl-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), a cyano group, a formyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group and a nitro group;
  • Substituent Group bl a Cl-6 alkyl group (wherein the alkyl group may be substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms), a C2-6 alkenyl group, a C3-8
  • Substituent Group cl i) an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group, Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group or C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 Cl-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), ii) a cyano group, iii) a halogen atom, iv) a hydroxyl group and v) v)-i) a Cl-6 alkyl group, v)-ii) a C2-6 alkenyl group, v)-iii) a C2-6 alkynyl group, v)-iv) a Cl-6 alkoxy group, v)-v) a Cl-6 alkylthio group, v)-vi) a Cl-6 alkylaminocarbonyl group, v)-vii) a C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group, v)
  • Ring A is a rive-membered aromatic heterocyclic group selected from the group consisting of the formulas [20] to [26]: [0014]
  • A* represents a bonding site to X 2 , or any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [28] to [39]: [0018]
  • [0021] represents a single bond or a double bond, each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from Substituent Group bl; 3) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to
  • Ring A is any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [21], [28], [29], [31], [32] and [34] to [37]: [0022]
  • Ring A is any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [21],
  • Ring A is a ring of the formula [28-1]: [0029]
  • Ring B is a phenyl group, a pyridyl group, an oxazolyl group, an imidazolyl group, a thiazolyl group, a dihydrobenzofuranyl group or a thienyl group; 7) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to
  • R 2 is a Cl-6 alkoxy group and n is 1;
  • R 3 and R 4 are the same or different and are each (1) a hydrogen atom or (2) a halogen atom; 15)
  • R 3 and R 4 are each a hydrogen atom
  • the substituent for Ring A is a substituent selected from the group consisting of: a Cl-6 alkyl group (wherein the alkyl group may be substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms), a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C6-14 aryl group, a C6-14 aryl-Cl-6 alkyl group, a Cl-6 alkoxy group, a C3- 8 cycloalkyloxy group, a C2-6 alkanoyl group, a C7-15 aroyl group, a Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group, a C6-14 arylsulfonyl group, a cyano group, a formyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group and an oxo group; 17) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to 1), wherein the substituent for Ring B
  • a medicine comprising the compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to any one of 1) to 18) above as an active ingredient; and 20) The medicine according to 19) above for the treatment of a disease selected from
  • Alzheimer's disease dementia, Down's syndrome and amyloidosis.
  • a ⁇ according to the present invention are novel inventions that have not yet been described in any documents.
  • the compound of the present invention can be converted to a chemical probe for capturing a target protein in a bioactive low-molecular compound.
  • the compound of the present invention can be converted to an affinity chromatography probe, a photoaffinity probe or the like by introducing a labeling group, a linker or the like into a moiety differing from a structural moiety essential for expression of activity of the compound by a technique described in J. Mass Spectrum. Soc. Jpn. Vol. 51, No. 5, 2003, p. 492-498 or WO 2007/139149, for example.
  • Examples of the labeling group, the linker or the like used for the chemical probe include groups shown in the following group consisting of (1) to (5):
  • protein labeling groups such as photoaffinity labeling groups (such as a benzoyl group, a benzophenone group, an azido group, a carbonylazido group, a diaziridine group, an enone group, a diazo group and a nitro group) and chemical affinity groups (such as a ketone group substituted at the ⁇ -carbon atom with a halogen atom, a carbamoyl group, an ester group, an alkylthio group, Michael acceptors such as ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated ketones and esters, and an oxirane group),
  • photoaffinity labeling groups such as a benzoyl group, a benzophenone group, an azido group, a carbonylazido group, a diaziridine group, an enone group, a diazo group and a nitro group
  • chemical affinity groups such as a ketone group substituted at the ⁇ -carbon atom with a halogen
  • cleavable linkers such as -S-S-, -0-Si-O-, monosaccharides (such as a glucose group and a galactose group) and disaccharides (such as lactose), and enzymatically cleavable oligopeptide linkers,
  • fishing tag groups such as biotin and 3-(4,4-difluoro-5,7-dimethyl-4H-3a,4a- diaza-4-bora-s-indacen-3-yl)propionyl,
  • detectable markers such as radioactive labeling groups such as 125 1, 32 P, 3 H and 14 C; fluorescence labeling groups such as fluorescein, rhodamine, dansyl, umbelliferone, 7- mtrofurazanyl and 3-(4,4-difluoro-5,7-dimethyl-4H-3a,4a-diaza-4-bora-s-indacen-3- yl)propionyl; chemiluminescent groups such as luciferin and luminol; and heavy metal ions such as lanthanoid metal ions and radium ions, and (5) groups bound to solid-phase carriers such as glass beads, glass beds, microtiter plates, agarose beads, agarose beds, polystyrene beads, polystyrene beds, nylon beads and nylon beds.
  • radioactive labeling groups such as 125 1, 32 P, 3 H and 14 C
  • fluorescence labeling groups such as fluorescein, rhodamine
  • the probe When a probe is prepared by introducing a labeling group or the like selected from the group consisting of (1) to (5) above into the compound of the present invention in accordance with a method described in the above documents or the like, the probe can be used as a chemical probe for identification of labeled proteins useful for searching for novel drug targets, for example.
  • a structural formula of a compound may represent a certain isomer for convenience.
  • the present invention includes all isomers and isomer mixtures such as geometric isomers which can be generated from the structure of a compound, optical isomers based on asymmetric carbon, stereoisomers and tautomers.
  • the present invention is not limited to the description of a chemical formula for convenience and may include any one of the isomers or mixtures thereof.
  • the compound of the present invention may have an asymmetric carbon atom in the molecule and exist as an optically active compound or racemate, and the present invention includes each of the optically active compound and the racemate without limitations.
  • crystal polymorphs of the compound may be present, the compound is not limited thereto as well and may be present as a single crystal form or a mixture of single crystal forms.
  • the compound may be an anhydride or hydrate.
  • the present invention also includes isotopically-labelled compounds, which are identical to the compounds of formula (I), except that one or more atoms are replaced by an atom having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number uusually found in nature.
  • isotopes that can be incorporated into compounds of the invention include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine, iodine, and chlorine, such as 2 H, 3 H, 11 C, 14 C, 18 F, 35 S, 123 I and 125 I.
  • Compounds of the present invention and pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives e.g.
  • Isotopically— labelled compounds of the present invention for example those into which radioactive isotopes such as 3 H and/or 14 C are incorporated, are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distribution assays. 3 H and 14 C are considered useful due to their ease of preparation and detectability. 11 C and 18 F isotopes are considered useful in PET (positron emission tomography), and 125 I isotopes are considered useful in SPECT (single photon emission computerized tomography), all useful in brain imaging.
  • Isotopically labelled compounds of formula (I) of this invention can generally be prepared by carrying out the procedures disclosed in the Schemes and/or in the Examples below, by substituting a readily available isotopically labelled reagent for a non-isotopically labelled reagent.
  • Alzheimer's disease includes a wide variety of conditions such as Alzheimer's disease (for example, refer to, Klein WL, and 7 others, Alzheimer's disease- affected brain: Presence of oligomeric A ⁇ ligands (ADDLs) suggests a molecular basis for reversible memory loss, Proceeding National Academy of Science USA, 2003, Sep 2, 100 (18), p. 10417-10422; Nitsch RM, and 16 others, Antibodies against ⁇ -amyloid slow cognitive decline in Alzheimer's disease, Neuron, 2003, May 22, 38 (4), p.
  • ADDLs oligomeric A ⁇ ligands
  • senile dementia for example, refer to, Blass JP, Brain metabolism and brain disease: Is metabolic deficiency the proximate cause of Alzheimer dementia? Journal of Neuroscience Research, 2001, Dec 1, 66 (5), p. 851-856
  • frontotemporal dementia for example, refer to, Evin G, and 11 others, Alternative transcripts of presenilin-1 associated with frontotemporal dementia, Neuroreport, 2002, Apr 16, 13 (5), p. 719- 723
  • Pick disease for example, refer to, Yasuhara O, and 3 others, Accumulation of amyloid precursor protein in brain lesions of patients with Pick disease, Neuroscience Letters, 1994, Apr 25, 171 (1-2), p.
  • Down's syndrome for example, refer to, Teller JK, and 10 others, Presence of soluble amyloid ⁇ -peptide precedes amyloid plaque formation in Down's syndrome, Nature Medicine, 1996, Jan, 2 (1), p. 93-95; Tokuda T, and 6 others, Plasma levels of amyloid ⁇ proteins A ⁇ 1-40 and A ⁇ 1-42 (43) are elevated in Down's syndrome, Annals of Neurology, 1997, Feb, 41 (2), p. 271-273), cerebrovascular angiopathy (for example, refer to, Hayashi Y, and 9 others, Evidence for presenilin-1 involvement in amyloid angiopathy in the Alzheimer's disease- affected brain, Brain Research, 1998, Apr 13, 789 (2), p. 307-314; Barelli H, and 15 others,
  • Cerebral amyloid angiopathy is a pathogenic lesion in Alzheimer's Disease due to a novel presenilin-1 mutation, Brain, 2001, Dec, 124 (12), p. 2383-2392), hereditary cerebral hemorrhage with amyloidosis (Dutch type) (for example, refer to, Cras P, and 9 others, Presenile Alzheimer dementia characterized by amyloid angiopathy and large amyloid core type senile plaques in the APP 692AIa --> GIy mutation, Acta Neuropathology (Berl), 1998, Sep, 96 (3), p.
  • Dutch type hereditary cerebral hemorrhage with amyloidosis
  • cognitive impairment for example, refer to, Laws SM, and 7 others, Association between the presenilin-1 mutation Glu318Gly and complaints of memory impairment, Neurobiology of Aging, 2002, Jan-Feb, 23 (1), p. 55-58
  • memory disturbance/learning disturbance for example, refer to, Vaucher E, and 5 others, Object recognition memory and cholinergic parameters in mice expressing human presenilin 1 transgenes, Experimental Neurology, 2002 Jun, 175 (2), p. 398-406; Morgan D, and 14 others, A ⁇ peptide vaccination prevents memory loss in an animal model of Alzheimer's disease, Nature, 2000 Dec 21-28, 408 (6815), p.
  • cerebrovascular dementia for example, refer to, Sadowski M, and 6 others, Links between the pathology of Alzheimer's disease and vascular dementia, Neurochemical Research, 2004, Jun, 29 (6), p. 1257-1266
  • ophthalmoplegia for example, refer to, O'Riordan S, and 7 others
  • Presenilin- 1 mutation E280G
  • spastic paraparesis and cranial MRI white-matter abnormalities
  • multiple sclerosis for example, refer to, Gehrmann J, and 4 others, Amyloid precursor protein (APP) expression in multiple sclerosis lesions, GHa, 1995, Oct, 15 (2), p. 141-51; Reynolds WF, and 6 others, Myeloperoxidase polymorphism is associated with gender specific risk for Alzheimer's disease, Experimental Neurology, 1999, Jan, 155 (1), p. 31-41), head injury, skull damage (for example, refer to, Smith DH, and 4 others, Protein accumulation in traumatic brain injury,
  • APP Amyloid precursor protein
  • apraxia for example, refer to, Matsubara- Tsutsui M, and 7 others, Molecular evidence of presenilin 1 mutation in familial early onset dementia, American journal of Medical Genetics, 2002, Apr 8, 114 (3), p. 292-298
  • prion disease familial amyloid neuropathy, triplet repeat disease (for example, refer to, Kirkitadze MD, and 2 others, Paradigm shifts in Alzheimer's disease and other neurodegenerative disorders: the emerging role of oligomeric assemblies, Journal of Neuroscience Research, 2002, Sep 1, 69 (5), p.
  • Amyloid- ⁇ deposition in the cerebral cortex in Dementia with Lewy bodies is accompanied by a relative increase in A ⁇ PP mRNA isoforms containing the Kunitz protease inhibitor, Neurochemistry International, 2005, Feb, 46 (3), p. 253-260; Primavera J, and 4 others, Brain accumulation of amyloid- ⁇ in Non- Alzheimer Neurodegeneration, Journal of Alzheimer's Disease, 1999, Oct, 1 (3), p.
  • Parkinsonism-dementia complex for example, refer to, Schmidt ML, and 6 others, Amyloid plaques in Guam amyotrophic lateral sclerosis/ parkinsonism-dementia complex contain species of A ⁇ similar to those found in the amyloid plaques of Alzheimer's disease and pathological aging, Acta Neuropathologica (Berl), 1998, Feb, 95 (2), p. 117-122; Ito H, and 3 others, Demonstration of ⁇ amyloid protein- containing neurofibrillary tangles in parkinsonism-dementia complex on Guam, Neuropathology and applied neurobiology, 1991, Oct, 17 (5), p.
  • frontotemporal dementia and Parkinsonism linked to chromosome 17 for example, refer to, Rosso SM, and 3 others, Coexistent tau andamyloid pathology in hereditary frontotemporal dementia with tau mutations, Annals of the New York academy of sciences, 2000, 920, p. 115-119
  • Dementia with argyrophilic grains for example, refer to, Tolnay M, and 4 others, Low amyloid (A ⁇ ) plaque load and relative predominance of diffuse plaques distinguish argyrophilic grain disease from Alzheimer's disease, Neuropathology and applied neurobiology, 1999, Aug, 25 (4), p.
  • Niemann-Pick disease for example, refer to, Jin LW, and 3 others, Intracellular accumulation of amyloidogenic fragments of amyloid- ⁇ precursor protein in neurons with Niemann-Pick type C defects is associated with endosomal abnormalities, American Journal of Pathology, 2004, Mar, 164 (3), p. 975-985
  • amyotrophic lateral sclerosis for example, refer to, Sasaki S, and another, Immunoreactivity of ⁇ -amyloid precursor protein in amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Acta Neuropathologica (Berl), 1999, May, 97 (5), p.
  • hydrocephalus for example, refer to, Weller RO, Pathology of cerebrospinal fluid and interstitial fluid of the CNS: Significance for Alzheimer's disease, prion disorders and multiple sclerosis, Journal of Neuropathology and Experimental Neurology, 1998, Oct, 57 (10), p. 885-894; Silverberg GD, and 4 others, Alzheimer's disease, normal-pressure hydrocephalus, and senescent changes in CSF circulatory physiology: a hypothesis, Lancet neurology, 2003, Aug, 2 (8), p.
  • Cerebral amyloid angiopathy Accumulation of A ⁇ in interstitial fluid drainage pathways in Alzheimer's disease, Annals of the New York academy of sciences, 2000, Apr, 903, p. 110-117; Yow HY, and another, A role for cerebrovascular disease in determining the pattern of ⁇ -amyloid deposition in Alzheimer's disease, Neurology and applied neurobiology, 2002, 28, p. 149; Weller RO, and 4 others, Cerebrovascular disease is a major factor in the failure of elimination of A ⁇ from the aging human brain, Annals of the New York academy of sciences, 2002, Nov, 977, p.
  • paraparesis for example, refer to, O'Riordan S, and 7 others, Presenilin-1 mutation (E280G), spastic paraparesis, and cranial MRI white-matter abnormalities, Neurology, 2002, Oct 8, 59 (7), p. 1108-1110; Matsubara-Tsutsui M, and 7 others, Molecular evidence of presenilin 1 mutation in familial early onset dementia, American journal of Medical Genetics, 2002, Apr 8, 114 (3), p. 292-298; Smith MJ, and 11 others, Variable phenotype of Alzheimer's disease with spastic paraparesis, Annals of Neurology, 2001, 49 (1), p.
  • spasm for example, refer to, Singleton AB, and 13 others, Pathology of early-onset Alzheimer's disease cases bearing the Thrll3-114ins presenilin-1 mutation, Brain, 2000, Dec, 123 (Ptl2), p. 2467-2474
  • mild cognitive impairment for example, refer to, Gattaz WF, and 4 others, Platelet phospholipase A2 activity in Alzheimer's disease and mild cognitive impairment, Journal of Neural Transmission, 2004, May, 111 (5), p. 591-601; Assini A, and M others, Plasma levels of amyloid ⁇ -protein 42 are increased in women with mild cognitive impariment, Neurology, 2004, Sep 14, 63 (5), p.
  • arteriosclerosis for example, refer to, De Meyer GR, and 8 others, Platelet phagocytosis and processing of ⁇ -amyloid precursor protein as a mechanism of macrophage activation in atherosclerosis, Circulation Reserach, 2002, Jun 14, 90 (11), p. 1197-1204).
  • Ri and R 2 are the same or different and each represent a substituent selected from the following Substituent Group al . [0041]
  • the "Substituent Group al” refers to a group consisting of a C 1-6 alkyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C2-6 alkenyl group, a C 1-6 alkoxy group, a C2-6 alkenyloxy group, a C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group, an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 acyl group or C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 C 1-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), a cyano group, a formyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group and a nitro group.
  • a Cl-6 alkyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a Cl-6 alkoxy group and a C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group are preferable, and a Cl-6 alkyl group, a halogen atom and a Cl-6 alkoxy group are particularly preferable.
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 3 and is preferably 0 to 2, and particularly preferably 1 to 2.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 2 and is preferably 0 to 1, and particularly preferably 1.
  • Xi represents i) a single bond, ii) [0045]
  • X 2 represents i) a single bond, ii) a Cl-6 alkylene group or iii) -X 3 - (wherein X 3 represents -NR5-
  • R 5 represents a hydrogen atom, a Cl-6 alkyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C2-6 alkanoyl group or a Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group), and is preferably i) a single bond or ii)
  • Ring A represents i) a five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group or ii) a five- membered aromatic heterocyclic group fused with a 5- to 14-membered non-aromatic ring group, which contains two or more nitrogen atoms and may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the following Substituent Group bl (wherein the non-aromatic ring group may have a crosslinked structure or a spiro ring system).
  • the "five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group” is not particularly limited insofar as it is a five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group containing two or more nitrogen atoms.
  • the group preferably refers to a five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group selected from the group consisting of the formulas [20] to [26]:
  • A* represents a bonding site to X 2 , and more preferably refers to a ring of the formula [21]: [0053]
  • the group may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the following Substituent Group bl. [0055]
  • the "f ⁇ ve-membered aromatic heterocyclic group fused with a 5- to 14-membered non-aromatic ring group (wherein the non-aromatic ring group may have a crosslinked structure or a spiro ring system)" is not particularly limited insofar as it is a five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group fused with a 5- to 14-membered non-aromatic ring group which contains two or more nitrogen atoms (wherein non-aromatic ring group may have a crosslinked structure or a spiro ring system).
  • the group is preferably any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [28] to [39]: [0056]
  • [0063] are as defined above, and particularly preferably a ring selected from the group consisting of the formula [28-1]: [0064]
  • the group may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the following Substituent Group bl.
  • the phrase "may have a crosslinked structure or a spiro ring system” refers to the fact that two carbon atoms on the non-aromatic ring group together may form a crosslinked structure, or the fact that a carbon atom on the non-aromatic ring group may form a spiro ring system.
  • the "Substituent Group bl” refers to a group consisting of a Cl -6 alkyl group
  • alkyl group may be substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms
  • a C2-6 alkenyl group a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C6-14 aryl group, a C6-14 aryl-Cl-6 alkyl group, a Cl -6 alkoxy group, a C2-6 alkenyloxy group, a C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group, a C2-6 alkanoyl group, a C4-9 cycloalkylcarbonyl group, a C7-15 aroyl group, a C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group, a C2-6 alkenylsulfonyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group, a C6-14 arylsulfonyl group, a C 1-6 alkylthio group, a C2-6 alkenylthio group, a C3-8 cycloalkylthio group,
  • a substituent selected from the group consisting of a C 1-6 alkyl group (wherein the alkyl group may be substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms), a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C6-14 aryl group, a C6-14 aryl-Cl-6 alkyl group, a C 1-6 alkoxy group, a C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group, a C2-6 alkanoyl group, a C7-15 aroyl group, a C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group, a C6-14 arylsulfonyl group, a cyano group, a formyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group and an oxo group.
  • Ring B represents, for example, a monocyclic or fused cyclic aromatic ring group selected from the group consisting of the formulas [2] to [19]: [0070]
  • Ring B is preferably a phenyl group, a pyridyl group, an oxazolyl group, an imidazolyl group, a thiazolyl group, a dihydrobenzofuranyl group or a thienyl group, and particularly preferably a phenyl group or a pyridyl group.
  • Ring B may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the following Substituent Group cl.
  • Substituent Group cl refers to a group consisting of i) an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group, C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group or C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 C 1-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), ii) a cyano group, iii) a halogen atom, iv) a hydroxyl group and v) v)-i) a C 1-6 alkyl group, v)-ii) a C2-6 alkenyl group, v)-iii) a C2-6 alkynyl group, v)-iv) a Cl -6 alkoxy group, v)-v) a C 1-6 alkylthio group, v)-vi) a C 1-6 alkylaminocarbonyl group, v)-vii) a
  • Particularly preferable is a substituent selected from the group consisting of i) a halogen atom and ii) ii)-i) a Cl -6 alkyl group and Ii)-Il) a C 1-6 alkoxy group, each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of a Cl -6 alkyl group and a halogen atom.
  • C 1-6 alkyl group refers to an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Preferable examples of the group include linear or branched alkyl groups such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, an isobutyl group, a tertiary butyl group, an n-pentyl group, an isopentyl group, a neopentyl group, an n-hexyl group, a 1-methylpropyl group, an 1,2-dimethylpropyl group, a 1-ethylpropyl group, a l-methyl-2- ethylpropyl group, a l-ethyl-2-methylpropyl group, a 1,1,2-trimethylpropyl group, a 1- methylbutyl group, a 2-methylbutyl group, a 1,1-dimethylbutyl group, a 2,2-dimethylbutyl group, a 2-ethylbutyl group,
  • halogen atom refers to a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom or the like and is preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom.
  • C 1-6 alkylene group refers to an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the group include linear or branched alkyl groups such as a methylene group, an ethylene group, a methylmethylene group, a propylene group, a methylethylene group, an ethylmethylene group, a dimethylmethylene group, a butylene group, a methylpropylene group, an ethylethylene group, a dimethylethylene group, a propylmethylene group, a pentylene group and a hexylene group.
  • a methylene group, an ethylene group, a methylmethylene group, a propylene group, a methylethylene group, an ethylmethylene group and a dimethylmethylene group are preferable, for example.
  • C3-8 cycloalkyl group refers to a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • Preferable examples of the group include a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group and a cycloheptyl group.
  • C2-6 alkanoyl group refers to an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is substituted with a carbonyl group.
  • Preferable examples of the group include an acetyl group, a propionyl group and a butyryl group.
  • C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group refers to an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by a sulfonyl group.
  • Preferable examples of the group include a methanesulfonyl group and an ethanesulfonyl group.
  • C2-6 alkenyl group refers to an alkenyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Preferable examples of the group include linear or branched alkenyl groups such as a vinyl group, an allyl group, a 1-propenyl group, an isopropenyl group, a 1-buten-l-yl group, a 1-buten-
  • C 1-6 alkoxy group refers to an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in which a hydrogen atom is replaced by an oxygen atom.
  • the group include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, an n-propoxy group, an isopropoxy group, an n- butoxy group, an isobutoxy group, a sec-butoxy group, a tertiary butoxy group, an n-pentoxy group, an isopentoxy group, a sec-pentoxy group, a tertiary pentoxy group, an n-hexoxy group, an isohexoxy group, a 1,2-dimethylpropoxy group, a 2-ethylpropoxy group, a l-methyl-2- ethylpropoxy group, a l-ethyl-2-methylpropoxy group, a 1,1,2-trimethylpropoxy group, a 1,1,2- trimethylpropoxy group, a 1,1-dimethylbutoxy group,
  • C2-6 alkenyloxy group refers to an alkenyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by an oxygen atom.
  • the group include linear or branched alkenyloxy groups such as a vinyloxy group, an allyloxy group, a 1-propenyloxy group, an isopropenyloxy group, a 1-buten-l-yloxy group, a l-buten-2-yloxy group, a l-buten-3-yloxy group, a 2-buten-l-yloxy group and a 2-buten-2-yloxy group.
  • C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group refers to a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by an oxygen atom.
  • the group include a cyclopropoxy group, a cyclobutoxy group, a cyclopentoxy group, a cyclohexoxy group and a cycloheptyloxy group.
  • C6-14 aryl group refers to an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms.
  • Preferable examples of the group include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthryl group and a phenanthryl group.
  • C6-14 aryl-Cl-6 alkyl group refers to an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by the aforementioned "C6-14 aryl group”.
  • Preferable examples of the group include a benzyl group, a phenethyl group, a phenylpropyl group, a naphthylmethyl group, a naphthylethyl group and a naphthylpropyl group.
  • the "C4-9 cycloalkylcarbonyl group” refers to a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms substituted with a carbonyl group.
  • Preferable examples of the group include a cyclopropylcarbonyl group, a cyclobutylcarbonyl group, a cyclopentylcarbonyl group, a cyclohexylcarbonyl group and a cycloheptylcarbonyl group.
  • the "C7-15 aroyl group” refers to the aforementioned "C6-14 aryl group” substituted with a carbonyl group.
  • Preferable examples of the group include a benzoyl group, a naphthylcarbonyl group and an anthrylcarbonyl group.
  • C2-6 alkenylsulfonyl group refers to an alkenyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by a sulfonyl group.
  • the group include linear or branched alkenylsulfonyl groups such as a vinylsulfonyl group, an allylsulfonyl group, a 1-propenylsulfonyl group, an isopropenylsulfonyl group, a 1-buten-l- ylsulfonyl group, a l-buten-2-ylsulfonyl group, a l-buten-3-ylsulfonyl group, a 2-buten-l- ylsulfonyl group and a 2-buten-2-ylsulfonyl group.
  • C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group refers to a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by a sulfonyl group.
  • the group include a cyclopropylsulfonyl group, a cyclobutylsulfonyl group, a cyclopentylsulfonyl group, a cyclohexylsulfonyl group and a cycloheptylsulfonyl group.
  • C6-14 arylsulfonyl group refers to an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by a sulfonyl group.
  • Preferable examples of the group include a phenylsulfonyl group, a naphthylsulfonyl group and an anthrylsulfonyl group.
  • C 1-6 alkylthio group refers to an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by a sulfur atom.
  • the group include a methylthio group, an ethylthio group, an n-propylthio group, an isopropylthio group, an n-butylthio group, an isobutylthio group, a tert-butylthio group, an n-pentylthio group, an isopentylthio group, a neopentylthio group, an n-hexylthio group and a 1-methylpropylthio group.
  • C2-6 alkenylthio group refers to an alkenylthio group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Preferable examples of the group include linear or branched alkenylthio groups such as a vinylthio group, an allylthio group, a 1-propenylthio group, an isopropenylthio group, a 1- buten-1-ylthio group, a l-buten-2-ylthio group, a l-buten-3-ylthio group, a 2-buten-l-ylthio group and a 2-buten-2-ylthio group.
  • C3-8 cycloalkylthio group refers to a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by a sulfur atom.
  • the group include a cyclopropylthio group, a cyclobutylthio group, a cyclopentylthio group, a cyclohexylthio group and a cycloheptylthio group.
  • Examples of the "aminosulfonyl group which may have 1 to 2 C 1-6 alkyl groups,
  • C2-6 alkenyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups include an aminosulfonyl group as well as a methylaminosulfonyl group, an ethylaminosulfonyl group, a dimethylaminosulfonyl group, a diethylaminosulfonyl group, a vinylaminosulfonyl group, an allylaminosulfonyl group, a cyclopropylaminosulfonyl group, a cyclobutylaminosulfonyl group and a cyclohexylaminosulfonyl group.
  • amino group which may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group, C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group or C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 Cl -6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups
  • amino group as well as an acetylamino group, an propionylamino group, a methanesulfonylamino group, an ethanesulfonylamino group, a pentanesulfonylamino group, a methylamino group, a dimethylamino group, an ethylamino group, a diethylamino group, a cyclopropylamino group, a cyclobutylamino group and a cyclohexylamino group.
  • C 1-6 alkylaminocarbonyl group refers to an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by an aminocarbonyl group.
  • Preferable examples of the group include a methylaminocarbonyl group, an ethylaminocarbonyl group, a propylaminocarbonyl group, a butylaminocarbonyl group and a hexylaminocarbonyl group.
  • Cl -6 alkylaminosulfonyl group refers to an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by an aminosulfonyl group.
  • the group include a methylaminosulfonyl group, an ethylaminosulfonyl group, a propylaminosulfonyl group, a butylaminosulfonyl group and a hexylaminosulfonyl group.
  • the "pharmacologically acceptable salt” is not particularly limited insofar as it is a pharmacologically acceptable salt formed with the compound of the general formula (I) which is a therapeutic agent for a disease caused by A ⁇ .
  • the salt include hydrohalides (such as hydrofluorides, hydrochlorides, hydrobromides and hydroiodides), inorganic acid salts (such as sulfates, nitrates, perchlorates, phosphates, carbonates and bicarbonates), organic carboxylates (such as acetates, oxalates, maleates, tartrates, fumarates and citrates), organic sulfonates (such as methanesulfonates, trifiuoromethanesulfonates, ethanesulfonates, benzenesulfonates, toluenesulfonates and camphorsulfonates), amino acid salts (such as aspartates and glutamates), quaternary amine salts, alkali metal salts (such as sodium salts and potassium salts) and alkali earth metal salts (such as magnesium salts and calcium salts).
  • hydrohalides such as hydrofluorides, hydrochlorides, hydrobro
  • Ring A is preferably a five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group selected from the group consisting of the formulas [20] to [26]: [0099]
  • a « represents a bonding site to X 2 , or any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [28] to [39]: [0103]
  • [0106] represents a single bond or a double bond, each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from Substituent Group bl .
  • Ring A is more preferably any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [21], [28], [29], [31], [32] and [34] to [37]: [0107]
  • Ring A is particularly preferably any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [21], [28-1], [29-1], [31-1], [32-1] and [34-1] to [37-1]:
  • Ring A is most preferably a ring of the formula [28- 1 ] : [0115]
  • Ring B is preferably a phenyl group, a pyridyl group, an oxazolyl group, an imidazolyl group, a thiazolyl group, a dihydrobenzofuranyl group or a thienyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group.
  • X 2 is preferably i) a single bond or ii) a C 1-6 alkylene group, and X 2 is more preferably a single bond.
  • Ri is a Cl -6 alkyl group or a halogen atom and m is 1 to 2.
  • R 2 is a C 1-6 alkoxy group and n is 1.
  • R 3 and R4 are the same or different and are each (1) a hydrogen atom or (2) a halogen atom. More preferably, R 3 and R 4 are both hydrogen atoms.
  • the substituent for Ring A is preferably a substituent selected from the group consisting of a C 1-6 alkyl group (wherein the alkyl group may be substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms), a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C6-14 aryl group, a C6-14 aryl-Cl-6 alkyl group, a Cl -6 alkoxy group, a C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group, a C2-6 alkanoyl group, a C7-15 aroyl group, a C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group, a C6-14 arylsulfonyl group, a cyano group, a formyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group and an oxo group.
  • a C 1-6 alkyl group wherein the alkyl group may be substituted with 1 to 3 hal
  • the substituent for Ring B is preferably a substituent selected from the group consisting of i) an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group, C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group or C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 C 1-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), ii) a cyano group, iii) a halogen atom, iv) a hydroxyl group and v) v)-i) a Cl- 6 alkyl group, v)-ii) a Cl -6 alkoxy group, v)-iii) a C 1-6 alkylthio group and v)-iv) a phenyl group, each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of a C 1-6 alky
  • amyloid- ⁇ such as Alzheimer's disease, senile dementia, Down's syndrome or amyloidosis.
  • R 1 , R 2 , Xi, X 2 , m, n, Ring A and Ring B are as defined above, is synthesized according to a method such as the following General Preparation Method 1 and General Preparation Method 2, for example.
  • the method comprises a protection reaction step and a deprotection reaction step appropriately, using a protecting group known to a person skilled in the art which is suitably selected for each step (see T. Greene et al., "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis", John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1981).
  • the method comprises substituent conversion, substituent introduction and the like suitable for each step and known to a person skilled in the art. It is also obvious that, in order to prepare the compound of the present invention conveniently, all isomers and isomer mixtures such as geometric isomers which can be generated from the structure of the compound, optical isomers based on asymmetric carbon, stereoisomers, and tautomers can be prepared as a single compound by a technique known to a person skilled in the art which is suitable for each step such as fractional crystallization or column chromatography. [0132] General Preparation Method 1
  • Ri, R 2 , X 1 , X 2 , m, n, Ring A and Ring B are as defined above;
  • XA represents a halogen atom such as a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom or a sulfonate group such as a methanesulfonate group, a p-toluenesulfonate group or a trifluoromethanesulfonate group;
  • X B represents a trialkylstannyl group, a boronic acid group, a boronate group such as a pinacol boronate group, alkylboronalkenyl group, a C2-6 alkenyl group or a C2-6 alkynyl group.
  • the above General Preparation Method 1 is a method for preparing the compound of the general formula [I] by subjecting to coupling reaction in Step 1-1 a compound of the general formula (a-1) and a compound of the general formula (b-2) or a method for preparing the compound of the general formula [I] by subjecting to coupling reaction in Step 1-1 a compound of the general formula (a-2) and a compound of the general formula (b-1) in which the substituents X A and X B are replaced by each other.
  • the coupling reaction in Step 1-1 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction.
  • a method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • Preferable examples of the method include Mizoroki-Heck reaction (see R.F. Heck, “Org. Reactions.”, 1982, vol. 27, p. 345, for example), Suzuki-Miyaura reaction (see A. Suzuki, “Chem. Rev.”, 1995, vol. 95, p. 2457, for example), Sonogashira reaction (see K. Sonogashira, "Comprehensive Organic Synthesis", 1991, vol. 3, p. 521, for example) and Stille coupling reaction (see J.K.
  • a halogen compound or trifluoromethanesulfonate group compound of the general formula (a-1) is preferably coupled with 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (b-2) (wherein X B is preferably a C2-6 alkenyl group) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1) in the presence of 0.01 to 0.2 equivalent of a transition metal catalyst with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1), for example.
  • This reaction is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent from the viewpoint of handleability and stirring efficiency.
  • the solvent used varies according to the starting material and the transition metal catalyst used, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent.
  • the solvent include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, 1,2- dimethoxyethane, benzene, toluene, xylene, l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N,N- dimethylformamide.
  • the reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the coupling reaction, and is preferably room temperature to 150 0 C. This reaction is performed preferably in an inert gas atmosphere, and more preferably in a nitrogen or argon atmosphere.
  • the transition metal catalyst is preferably a palladium complex, for example, and more preferably a known palladium complex such as palladium (II) acetate, dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0). It is also preferable to appropriately add a phosphine ligand (preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine, tri-tert-butylphosphine or 2-(di-tert-butylphosphino)biphenyl, for example) in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed.
  • a phosphine ligand preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine, tri-tert-butylphosphine or 2-(di-tert-butylphosphin
  • a preferable result may be achieved in the presence of a base.
  • the base used is not particularly limited insofar as it is used in a coupling reaction similar to this reaction.
  • Preferable examples of the base include triethylamine, N,N-diisopropylethylamine, N 5 N- dicyclohexylmethylamine and tetrabutylammonium chloride.
  • the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique.
  • a halogen compound or trifluoromethanesulfonate compound of the general formula (a-1) is preferably coupled with 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (b-2) (wherein X B is preferably a boronic acid group, a boronate group such as a pinacol boronate group, an alkylboronalkenyl group or the like) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1) in the presence of 0.01 to 0.5 equivalent of a transition metal catalyst with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1), for example.
  • This reaction is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent from the viewpoint of handleability and stirring efficiency.
  • the solvent used varies according to the starting material and the transition metal catalyst used, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent.
  • the solvent include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, 1,2- dimethoxyethane, benzene, toluene, xylene, l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N,N-dimethylformamide, water and a mixed solvent thereof.
  • the reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the coupling reaction, and is preferably room temperature to 200 0 C.
  • the transition metal catalyst is preferably a known palladium complex, and more preferably a known palladium complex such as palladium (II) acetate, dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0).
  • a phosphorus ligand (preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine, tricyclohexylphosphine or tri-tert-butylphosphine, for example) may be appropriately added in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed.
  • a quaternary ammonium salt preferably tetrabutylammonium chloride or tetrabutylammonium bromide, for example, may also be appropriately added in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed.
  • a preferable result may be achieved in the presence of a base.
  • the base used at this time varies according to the starting material, the solvent used and the like, and is not particularly limited.
  • the base include sodium hydroxide, barium hydroxide, potassium fluoride, cesium fluoride, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, cesium carbonate and potassium phosphate.
  • the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique.
  • the Sonogashira reaction vary according to the starting material, the solvent and the transition metal catalyst, and are not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • a compound of the general formula (a-1) is coupled with 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (b-2) (wherein XB is preferably a C2-6 alkynyl group) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1) in the presence of 0.01 to 0.2 equivalent of a transition metal catalyst with respect to the compound of the general formula (a- 1), for example.
  • a compound of the general formula (b-2) wherein XB is preferably a C2-6 alkynyl group
  • the solvent used include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, benzene, toluene, xylene, l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N,N- dimethylformamide and dimethyl sulfoxide. More preferable examples of the solvent include tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N,N-dimethylformamide.
  • the reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the coupling reaction, and is preferably room temperature to 150 0 C.
  • the transition metal catalyst is, for example, a known palladium complex, and more preferably a known palladium complex such as palladium (II) acetate, dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0).
  • a phosphorus ligand (preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine or tri-tert- butylphosphine, for example) may be appropriately added, for example, in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed.
  • a metal halide or a quaternary ammonium salt preferably copper (I) iodide, lithium chloride, tetrabutylammonium fluoride or silver (I) oxide, for example.
  • a preferable result may be achieved in the presence of a base.
  • the base used here is not particularly limited insofar as it is used in a coupling reaction similar to this reaction.
  • Preferable examples of the base include basic solvents such as diethylamine, triethylamine, N,N-diisopropylethylamine, piperidine and pyridine.
  • a halogen compound or trifluoromethanesulfonate group compound of the general formula (a-1) is preferably coupled with 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (b-2) (wherein X B is preferably a trialkylstannyl group) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1) in the presence of 0.01 to 0.2 equivalent of a transition metal catalyst with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1), for example. It is preferable to appropriately use in this reaction 0.1 to 5.0 equivalents of copper (I) halide or/and lithium chloride in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed.
  • the solvent used in this reaction include toluene, xylene, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and dimethyl sulfoxide.
  • the reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the coupling reaction, and is preferably room temperature to 150 0 C.
  • the preferable transition metal catalyst is a palladium complex, preferably a known palladium complex such as palladium (II) acetate, dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0), for example, and more preferably palladium (II) acetate, tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0), for example.
  • a known palladium complex such as palladium (II) acetate, dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0), for example, and more preferably
  • a phosphorus ligand (preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine, 1 ,3- bis(diphenylphosphino)propane or tri-tert-butylphosphine, for example) may be appropriately added, for example, in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed.
  • This reaction is performed preferably in an inert gas atmosphere, and more preferably in a nitrogen or argon atmosphere. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique.
  • Step 1-2 is an example of a method for preparing a compound of the general formula (a-2) and a compound of the general formula (b-2) in which the substituents X A and XB are replaced by each other.
  • This step varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction.
  • the same method as in Step 1-1 may be preferably used such as Mizoroki-Heck reaction (see R.F. Heck, "Org. Reactions.”, 1982, vol. 27, p. 345, for example), Suzuki-Miyaura reaction (see A. Suzuki, “Chem. Rev.”, 1995, vol. 95, p. 2457, for example), Sonogashira reaction (see K.
  • the compound of the formula (a-1), the compound of the formula (a-2), the compound of the formula (b-1) and the compound of the formula (b-2) are known or commercially available compounds or are compounds that can be prepared from these compounds by a conventional method. [0141]
  • Ri, R 2 , m, n and X A are as defined above; R A and RB are as defined for Ri above;
  • Li represents a halogen atom such as a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom or a sulfonate group such as a methanesulfonate group, a p-toluenesulfonate group or a trifluoromethanesulfonate group; and
  • L 2 represents a halogen atom such as a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom, a sulfonate group such as a methanesulfonate group, a p-toluenesulfonate group or a trifluoromethanesulfonate group or a boronic acid group.
  • the compound of the general formula (a-1) can be prepared from an amine compound (a-3) as a starting material through formylation in Step 2-1, coupling reaction in Step 2-2 and formation of an imidazole ring in Step 2-3, or can be prepared from a compound of the general formula (a-4) as a starting material by coupling reaction in Step 2-4.
  • Step 2-1 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction.
  • a method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • a method reported in many documents or the like T. Greene et al., "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis", John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1981, for example
  • Step 2-2 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction.
  • a method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • Preferable examples of the method include a method of stirring a compound of the general formula (a-5) and 1.0 to 10.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (c-1) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a- 5) in a solvent in the presence of 1.0 to 10.0 equivalents of a base with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-5).
  • the base used varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited.
  • Preferable examples of the base include alkali metal hydrides (such as sodium hydride and lithium hydride), alkali metal salts (such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate and cesium carbonate) and metal alkoxides (such as sodium methoxide and potassium tert-butoxide).
  • the solvent used varies according to the starting material, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent.
  • the solvent include ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, 1 ,4-dioxane and diethyl ether; halogenated solvents such as methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and chloroform; polar solvents such as N,N-dirnethylformamide and N- methylpyrrolidone; non-polar solvents such as toluene and benzene; and mixtures thereof.
  • ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, 1 ,4-dioxane and diethyl ether
  • halogenated solvents such as methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and chloroform
  • polar solvents such as N,N-dirnethylformamide and N- methylpyrrolidon
  • the reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably 0 0 C to 200 0 C, for example. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique, extraction or/and crystallization. [0147]
  • Step 2-3 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction.
  • a method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • a method reported in many documents or the like such as described in The Chemistry of Heterocyclic Compounds. Imidazole and Derivatives, Part I, p. 33, Inters. Publish. 1953) may be used.
  • Preferable examples of the method include a method for preparing the compound of the general formula (a-1) by forming an imidazole ring from a compound of the general formula (a-6) and ammonia, ammonium salt, formamide or the like as a nitrogen source.
  • the solvent used is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent.
  • the solvent include non-polar solvents such as toluene and benzene; alcohol solvents such as methanol and ethanol; organic acids such as acetic acid or trifluoroacetic acid, sulfonic acids such as p-toluenesulfonic acid and trifluoromethanesulfonic acid; water; and mixtures thereof.
  • Formamide may optionally be used as a nitrogen atom source and as a solvent.
  • the reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably room temperature to 250 0 C, for example.
  • the yield may be improved when the reaction is performed using a tight container. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique, extraction or/and crystallization. [0148]
  • the coupling reaction in Step 2-4 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction.
  • a method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • a method reported in many documents or the like (such as described in D.D. Davey et al., "J. Med. Chem.”, 1991, vol. 34, p. 2671 -2677) may be used.
  • Examples of the method include a method of stirring a compound of the general formula (a-4) and 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of an imidazole compound (c-2) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-4) in a solvent in the presence or absence of 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a base with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-4).
  • Preferable examples of the base used include sodium hydride, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, barium carbonate, pyridine, lutidine and triethylamine.
  • the solvent used varies according to the starting material, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent.
  • the solvent include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethyl sulfoxide, N,N-dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidine.
  • the base may optionally be used as a solvent.
  • the reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably room temperature to 150 0 C, for example. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique or/and crystallization.
  • Examples of the coupling reaction in Step 2-4 include a method of stirring a compound of the general formula (a-4) (wherein L 2 is preferably a boronic acid group or the like) in a solvent in the presence of a copper catalyst (such as described in J.P. Collman et al., "Org. Letters.”, 2000, vol. 2, p. 1233-1236).
  • Preferable examples of the method include a method of stirring a compound of the general formula (a-4) and 0.1 to 10.0 equivalents of an imidazole compound (c-2) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-4) in a solvent in the presence of 0.01 to 1.0 equivalent of a copper reagent such as copper, copper bromide or copper iodide with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-4).
  • a copper reagent such as copper, copper bromide or copper iodide with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-4).
  • the copper reagent used varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited.
  • the copper reagent include copper (I) halide, copper (II) acetate, copper (II) nitrate and di- ⁇ -hydroxo-bis[(N,N,N',N'-tetramethylethylenediamine)copper (II)] chloride.
  • the solvent used varies according to the starting material, the reagent and the like, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent.
  • the solvent include ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane and diethyl ether; halogenated solvents such as methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and chloroform; polar solvents such as ethyl acetate, N,N-dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidone; non-polar solvents such as toluene, benzene and dichlorobenzene; and mixtures thereof.
  • a base may be used depending on the starting material, the reagent and the like.
  • the base include organic bases such as triethylamine, pyridine and tetramethylethylenediamine; alkali metal salts such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, potassium acetate, sodium acetate and cesium carbonate; and metal alkoxides such as sodium methoxide and potassium tert-butoxide.
  • the reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably room temperature to 200 0 C, for example. Good results such as reduction in the reaction time and improvement of the yield can be achieved when the reaction is performed in an oxygen atmosphere or air stream. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique, extraction or/and crystallization.
  • X 2 , X A , Ring A and Ring B are as defined above; L3 and L4 are as defined for L 1 above; Xc represents a C2-4 alkylene group, or a C2-3 alkylene group in which one methylene group is replaced by an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom (wherein the nitrogen atom may have a substituent such as a C 1-6 alkyl group or a benzyl group); Pi represents a carboxyl-protecting group such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a benzyl group, an allyl group, a triphenylmethyl group, a tert-butyl group or a tert-butyldimethylsilyl group, or a hydrogen atom; and P 2 represents a nitrogen-protecting group such as a tert-butoxycarbonyl group or a benzyloxycarbonyl group.
  • the compound of the general formula (b-1) can be prepared from a compound of the general formula (d-1) as a starting material through alkylation in Step 3-1, hydrazidation and deprotection reaction in Step 3-2, formation of Ring A in Step 3-3 and Sandmeyer reaction in Step 3-4.
  • Step 3-1 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • Preferable examples of the method include a method of stirring a compound of the general formula (d-1) and 1.0 to 10.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (e-1) with respect to the compound of the general formula (d- 1) in a solvent in the presence of 1.0 to 10.0 equivalents of a base with respect to the compound of the general formula (d-1).
  • the base used varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited.
  • the base include alkali metal hydrides (such as sodium hydride and lithium hydride), alkali metal salts (such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate and cesium carbonate), metal alkoxides (such as sodium methoxide and potassium tert-butoxide) and organometallic bases (such as butyllithium, lithium diisopropylamide and lithium bistrimethylsilylamide).
  • alkali metal hydrides such as sodium hydride and lithium hydride
  • alkali metal salts such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate and cesium carbonate
  • metal alkoxides such as sodium methoxide and potassium tert-butoxide
  • organometallic bases such as butyllithium, lithium diisopropylamide and lithium bistrimethylsilylamide.
  • the solvent include ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane and diethyl ether; halogenated solvents such as methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and chloroform; polar solvents such as N,N- dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidone; non-polar solvents such as toluene and benzene; and mixtures thereof.
  • the reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably -100 0 C to 100 0 C, for example. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique, extraction or/and crystallization. [0154]
  • the hydrazidation reaction as the first stage of Step 3-2 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction.
  • An amidation reaction known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • a method reported in many documents or the like such as described in The Chemical Society of Japan (ed.), Jikken Kagaku Koza (Courses in Experimental Chemistry), 4th edition (vol. 22) Yuki Gosei (Organic Synthesis) [IV], Maruzen Co., Ltd., November 1992, p. 137-144) may be used.
  • the deprotection reaction as the second stage varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction.
  • the Ring A formation reaction in Step 3-3 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction.
  • a method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • Preferable examples of the method include a method of heating a compound of the general formula (d-3) and 1.0 to 10.0 equivalents of aminoguanidine, isothiourea, cyanamide or the like with respect to the compound of the general formula (d-3) in a solvent under basic or acidic conditions.
  • the base or acid used varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited.
  • Examples of the base or acid include bases such as alkali metal hydrides (such as sodium hydride and lithium hydride), alkali metal salts (such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate and cesium carbonate), metal alkoxides (such as sodium methoxide and potassium tert-butoxide) and organic bases (such as triethylamine, pyridine and 1,8- diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene); and acids such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, p- toluenesulfonic acid and camphorsulfonic acid.
  • bases such as alkali metal hydrides (such as sodium hydride and lithium hydride), alkali metal salts (such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate and cesium carbonate), metal alkoxides (such as sodium methoxide and potassium tert-butoxide) and organic bases (such as triethylamine, pyridine and 1,8- diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-
  • the solvent used varies according to the starting material, and is not particularly limited insofar as the solvent does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent.
  • the solvent include alcohol solvents such as methanol, ethanol and tert-butanol; ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane and diethyl ether; halogenated solvents such as methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and chloroform; polar solvents such as acetonitrile, N,N-dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidone; non-polar solvents such as xylene, toluene and benzene; and mixtures thereof.
  • the reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably -100 0 C to 100 0 C, for example. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 48 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique, extraction or/and crystallization. [0156]
  • the Sandmeyer reaction in Step 3-4 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • X 2 , XA, X C5 P I , L 3 , Ring A and Ring B are as defined above, wherein X B represents a C2-6 alkenyl group and L 5 represents a leaving group such as a phenylthio group or a p-tolylsulfanyl group.
  • the compound of the general formula (b-2) can be prepared from a compound of the general formula (b-1) as a starting material in Step 1-2 as described above.
  • the compound can be prepared from a compound of the general formula (d-2) as a starting material through hydrazidation in Step 4- 1 , acy lation in Step 4-2, formation of Ring A in Step 4-
  • Step 4-1 may employ the same amidation reaction as in the aforementioned Step
  • Preferable examples of the method include a method of stirring a compound of the general formula (d-2) and 1.0 to 10.0 equivalents of hydrazine with respect to the compound of the general formula (d-1) in a solvent. Neutral reaction conditions are preferred in order to make the reaction conveniently proceed.
  • the solvent used varies according to the starting material, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent.
  • the solvent include ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane and diethyl ether; halogenated solvents such as methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and chloroform; polar solvents such as N 5 N- dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidone; non-polar solvents such as toluene and benzene; and mixtures thereof.
  • the reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably room temperature to 100 0 C, for example. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique, extraction or/and crystallization.
  • Step 4-2 may employ the same amidation reaction as in the aforementioned Step
  • Step 4-3 may employ the same cyclization conditions as in the aforementioned Step 2-3.
  • a compound of the general formula (b-4) can be conveniently prepared by heating with stirring a compound of the general formula (d-5) and 1.0 to 10 equivalents of phosphorus oxychloride with respect to the compound of the general formula (d- 5) and then heating the resulting compound and 1.0 to 10 equivalents of ammonium acetate with respect to the compound of the general formula (d-5) in an acetic acid solvent, for example.
  • the thermal decomposition reaction in Step 4-4 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction.
  • a method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • a method reported in many documents or the like such as described in W. Carrutthers, "Some modern methods of organic synthesis, Third Edition” (Cambridge University Press, 1986, p. 120- 121)) may be used.
  • the compound of the general formula (b-2) can be conveniently prepared by subjecting the compound of the general formula (b-4) to an oxidation reaction known to a person skilled in the art and heating the compound, for example.
  • Ri, R 2 , X 1 , X 2 , Xc, Pi, L 3 , m, n, Ring A and Ring B are as defined above.
  • the above General Preparation Method 2 shows an example describing preparation of the compound of the general formula [I] by subjecting a compound of the general formula (a-7) and a compound of the general formula (d-6) to cyclization reaction in Step 5-1.
  • the Ring A formation reaction in Step 5-1 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction.
  • a method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • Preferable examples of the method include a method of stirring a compound of the general formula (a-7) and 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (d-6) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-7) in a solvent in the presence of 1.0 to 10.0 equivalents of a base with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-7).
  • This reaction is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent from the viewpoint of handleability and stirring efficiency.
  • the solvent used varies according to the starting material, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent.
  • the solvent include alcohol solvents such as methanol, ethanol and tert-butanol; ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, 1,4- dioxane and diethyl ether; halogenated solvents such as methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and chloroform; polar solvents such as acetonitrile, propionitrile, N,N-dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidone; non-polar solvents such as toluene and benzene; and mixtures thereof.
  • the base used varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited.
  • the base include alkali metal hydrides (such as sodium hydride and lithium hydride), alkali metal salts (such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate and cesium carbonate), metal alkoxides (such as sodium methoxide and potassium tert-butoxide) and organic bases (such as triethylamine, N,N-diisopropylethylamine, l,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene and imidazole).
  • the reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably room temperature to 200 0 C, for example.
  • the reaction is completed in 1 to 7 days, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique.
  • An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique, extraction or/and crystallization.
  • the compound of the formula (d-6) is a known or commercially available compound or is a compound that can be prepared from such a compound by a conventional method.
  • Preparation of compound of general formula (a-7) The following formula shows an example of preparation of the compound of the general formula (a-7).
  • Ri, R 2 , m, n, X A and P 2 are as defined above; and M A represents a metal such as zinc or copper.
  • the compound of the general formula (a-7) can be prepared from a compound of the general formula (a-1) as a starting material through coupling reaction in Step 6-1, hydrolysis reaction and hydrazidation in Step 6-2 and deprotection reaction in Step 6-3.
  • the compound can be prepared from a compound of the general formula (a-1) as a starting material through coupling reaction in Step 6-4 and deprotection reaction in Step 6-3.
  • Step 6-1 and Step 6-4 vary according to the starting material and are not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in these reactions.
  • a method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reactions. Mizoroki-Heck reaction (see R.F. Heck, “Org. Reactions.”, 1982, vol. 27, p. 345, for example), Sonogashira reaction (see K. Sonogashira, "Comprehensive Organic Synthesis", 1991, vol. 3, p. 521, for example) or the like is preferable.
  • This reaction is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent from the viewpoint of handleability and stirring efficiency.
  • the solvent used varies according to the starting material and the transition metal catalyst used, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent.
  • the solvent include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, benzene, toluene, xylene, l-methyl-2- pyrrolidone and N,N-dimethylformamide.
  • the reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the coupling reaction, and is preferably room temperature to 150 0 C. This reaction is performed preferably in an inert gas atmosphere, and more preferably in a nitrogen or argon atmosphere.
  • the transition metal catalyst is preferably a palladium complex, for example, and more preferably a known palladium complex such as palladium (II) acetate, dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0). It is also preferable to appropriately add a phosphorus ligand (preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine, tri-tert-butylphosphine or 2-(di-tert-butylphosphino)biphenyl, for example) in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed.
  • a phosphorus ligand preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine, tri-tert-butylphosphine or 2-(di-tert-butylphosphino)bi
  • a preferable result may be achieved in the presence of a base.
  • the base used is not particularly limited insofar as it is used in a coupling reaction similar to this reaction.
  • Preferable examples of the base include triethylamine, N,N-diisopropylethylamine, N 5 N- dicyclohexylmethylamine and tetrabutylammonium chloride.
  • the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique.
  • the Sonogashira reaction vary according to the starting material, the solvent and the transition metal catalyst, and are not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction.
  • a method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • a compound of the general formula (a-1) is coupled with 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (f-2) or a compound of the general formula (f- 3), wherein Xi is preferably [0174]
  • the solvent used include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, benzene, toluene, xylene, l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N,N- dimethylformamide and dimethyl sulfoxide. More preferable examples of the solvent include tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N,N-dimethylformamide.
  • the reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the coupling reaction, and is preferably room temperature to 150 0 C.
  • This reaction is performed preferably in an inert gas atmosphere, and more preferably in a nitrogen or argon atmosphere. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique.
  • the transition metal catalyst is, for example, a known palladium complex, and more preferably a known palladium complex such as palladium (II) acetate, dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(diben2ylideneacetone)dipalladium (0).
  • a phosphorus ligand preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine or tritert-butylphosphine, for example
  • a metal halide or a quaternary ammonium salt preferably copper (I) iodide, lithium chloride, tetrabutylammonium fluoride or silver (I) oxide, for example.
  • a preferable result may be achieved in the presence of a base.
  • the base used here is not particularly limited insofar as it is used in a coupling reaction similar to this reaction.
  • Preferable examples of the base include organic bases such as diethylamine, triethylamine, N 5 N- diisopropylethylamine, piperidine and pyridine.
  • the coupling reaction in Step 6-1 may also employ a compound of the general formula (f-4) (wherein Xi is preferably a single bond).
  • a halogen compound or trifiuorornethanesulfonate group compound of the general formula (a-1) is preferably coupled with 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (f-4) (wherein X 1 is preferably a single bond) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1) in the presence of 0.01 to 0.2 equivalent of a transition metal catalyst with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1), for example.
  • This reaction is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent from the viewpoint of handleability and stirring efficiency.
  • the solvent used varies according to the starting material and the transition metal catalyst used, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent.
  • the solvent include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4- dioxane, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, benzene, toluene, xylene, l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N 5 N- dimethylformamide.
  • the reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the coupling reaction, and is preferably room temperature to 150 0 C. This reaction is performed preferably in an inert gas atmosphere, and more preferably in a nitrogen or argon atmosphere.
  • the transition metal catalyst is preferably a palladium complex, for example, and more preferably a known palladium complex such as palladium (II) acetate, dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0). It is also preferable to appropriately add a phosphorus ligand (preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine, tri-tert-butylphosphine or 2-(di-tert-butylphosphino)biphenyl, for example) in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed.
  • a phosphorus ligand preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine, tri-tert-butylphosphine or 2-(di-tert-butylphosphino)bi
  • a preferable result may be achieved in the presence of a base.
  • the base used is not particularly limited insofar as it is used in a coupling reaction similar to this reaction.
  • Preferable examples of the base include triethylamine, N 5 N-diisopropylethylamine, N 5 N- dicyclohexylmethylamine and tetrabutylammonium chloride.
  • the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique.
  • the hydrolysis reaction as the first stage of Step 6-2 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction.
  • a method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • a method reported in many documents such as described in The Chemical Society of Japan (ed.), Jikken Kagaku Koza (Courses in Experimental Chemistry), 4th edition (vol. 22) Yuki Gosei (Organic Synthesis) [IV], Maruzen Co., Ltd., November 1992, p. 12-13) may be used.
  • the hydrazidation reaction as the second stage varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction.
  • An amidation reaction known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • the deprotection reaction in Step 6-3 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction.
  • a deprotection reaction known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • a method reported in many documents or the like see T. Greene et al., "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis", John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1981, for example) may be used.
  • X 2 , Xc, Ring B, Pi, L 3 and L 4 are as defined above.
  • the compound of the general formula (d-6) can be prepared from a compound of the general formula (d-7) as a starting material through alkylation reaction in Step 3-1 and imidation in Step 7-1.
  • Step 3-1 is performed by the same method as described above and can prepare a compound of the general formula (d-8) from a compound of the general formula (d-7).
  • Step 7-1 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction.
  • a method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction.
  • Preferable examples of the method include a method of stirring the compound of the general formula (d-8) in an alcohol solvent in the presence of 5.0 to 100.0 equivalents of an acid with respect to the compound of the general formula (d-8).
  • the acid used varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited.
  • Preferable examples of the acid include hydrogen chloride gas and acetyl chloride.
  • the solvent used varies according to the starting material, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent.
  • the solvent include alcoholic solvents such as methanol, ethanol and tert-butanol.
  • Preferable examples of the solvent also include halogenated solvents such as a methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and chloroform; polar solvents such as N 5 N- dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidone; non-polar solvents such as toluene and benzene; and mixed solvents thereof.
  • the reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably 0 0 C to 100 0 C, for example.
  • the reaction is completed in 1 to 7 days, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique.
  • An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique, extraction or/and crystallization.
  • the compound of the formula (d-7) and the compound of the formula (e-1) are known or commercially available compounds or are compounds that can be prepared from these compounds by a conventional method.
  • the compound of the general formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof according to the present invention is effective for the treatment of a disease caused by A ⁇ and is excellent in terms of pharmacokinetics, toxicity, stability, absorption and the like.
  • a therapeutic agent for a disease caused by A ⁇ comprising the compound of the formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof according to the present invention as an active ingredient can be prepared by a conventional method.
  • the dosage form include tablets, powders, fine granules, granules, coated tablets, capsules, syrups, troches, inhalants, suppositories, injections, ointments, ophthalmic solutions, ophthalmic ointments, nasal drops, ear drops, cataplasms and lotions.
  • the agent can be prepared by using ingredients typically used such as an excipient, a binder, a lubricant, a colorant and a corrective, and ingredients used where necessary such as a stabilizer, an emulsif ⁇ er, an absorbefacient, a surfactant, a pH adjuster, a preservative and an antioxidant, and can be prepared by blending ingredients generally used as materials for a pharmaceutical preparation.
  • ingredients typically used such as an excipient, a binder, a lubricant, a colorant and a corrective
  • ingredients used where necessary such as a stabilizer, an emulsif ⁇ er, an absorbefacient, a surfactant, a pH adjuster, a preservative and an antioxidant, and can be prepared by blending ingredients generally used as materials for a pharmaceutical preparation.
  • ingredients include animal and vegetable oils such as soybean oil, beef tallow and synthetic glyceride; hydrocarbons such as liquid paraffin, squalane and solid paraffin; ester oils such as octyldodecyl myristate and isopropyl myristate; higher alcohols such as cetostearyl alcohol and behenyl alcohol; a silicone resin; silicone oil; surfactants such as polyoxyethylene fatty acid ester, sorbitan fatty acid ester, glycerin fatty acid ester, polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid ester, polyoxyethylene hydrogenated castor oil and a polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene block copolymer; water-soluble polymers such as hydroxyethylcellulose, polyacrylic acid, a carboxyvinyl polymer, polyethylene glycol, polyvinylpyrrolidone and methylcellulose; lower alcohols such as ethanol and isopropanol; polyhydric alcohols such as glycerin, propylene
  • excipient used examples include lactose, corn starch, saccharose, glucose, mannitol, sorbitol, crystalline cellulose and silicon dioxide.
  • binder used include polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl ether, methylcellulose, ethylcellulose, gum arabic, tragacanth, gelatin, shellac, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, a polypropylene glycol-polyoxyethylene block copolymer and meglumine.
  • disintegrant used include starch, agar, gelatin powder, crystalline cellulose, calcium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, calcium citrate, dextrin, pectin and carboxymethylcellulose calcium.
  • Examples of the lubricant used include magnesium stearate, talc, polyethylene glycol, silica and hydrogenated vegetable oil.
  • Examples of the colorant used include those permitted to be added to pharmaceuticals.
  • Examples of the corrective used include cocoa powder, menthol, empasm, mentha oil, borneol and cinnamon powder.
  • an oral preparation is prepared by adding an active ingredient compound or a salt thereof or a hydrate of the compound or salt, an excipient, and, where necessary, a binder, a disintegrant, a lubricant, a colorant and a corrective, for example, and then forming the mixture into powder, fine granules, granules, tablets, coated tablets or capsules, for example, by a conventional method. It is obvious that tablets or granules may be appropriately coated, for example, sugar coated, where necessary.
  • a syrup or an injection preparation is prepared by adding a pH adjuster, a solubilizer and an isotonizing agent, for example, and a solubilizing agent, a stabilizer and the like where necessary by a conventional method.
  • An external preparation may be prepared by any conventional method without specific limitations.
  • a base material any of various materials usually used for a pharmaceutical, a quasi drug, a cosmetic or the like can be used. Examples of the base material include materials such as animal and vegetable oils, mineral oils, ester oils, waxes, higher alcohols, fatty acids, silicone oils, surfactants, phospholipids, alcohols, polyhydric alcohols, water-soluble polymers, clay minerals and purified water.
  • a pH adjuster, an antioxidant, a chelator, a preservative and fungicide, a colorant, a flavor or the like may be added where necessary. Further, an ingredient having a differentiation inducing effect such as a blood flow enhancer, a bactericide, an antiphlogistic, a cell activator, vitamin, amino acid, a humectant or a keratolytic agent may be blended where necessary.
  • the dose of the therapeutic agent according to the present invention varies according to the degree of symptoms, age, sex, body weight, mode of administration, type of salt and specific type of disease, for example.
  • the compound of the formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof is orally administered to an adult at about 30 ⁇ g to 10 g, preferably 100 ⁇ g to 5 g, and more preferably 100 ⁇ g to 100 mg per day, or is administered to an adult by injection at about 30 ⁇ g to 1 g, preferably 100 ⁇ g to 500 mg, and more preferably 100 ⁇ g to 30 mg per day, in a single dose or several divided doses, respectively.
  • the compound of the formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof according to the present invention may be used in combination with compounds having the following mechanisms.
  • the compounds usable in combination include cholinesterase inhibitors (e.g., donepezil, huperzine A, tacrine, rivastigmine, galantamine); AMPA receptor antagonists (e.g., 1,2-dihydropyridine compounds such as 3-(2-cyanophenyl)-5-(2-pyridyl)-l- phenyl-l,2-dihydropyridin-2-one); NMDA receptor antagonists (e.g., memantine); acetylcholine releasing stimulants (e.g., pramiracetam; aniracetam); calcium channel agonists (e.g., nef ⁇ racetam); free radical scavengers (e.g., EGb 761); platelet activating factor antagonists (e.g., EGb 761); platelet aggregation antagonists (e.g., EGb 761, triflusal); insulin sensitizers (e.g., rosi
  • angiogenesis inhibitors e.g., paclitaxel
  • immunosuppressants e.g., paclitaxel
  • tubulin antagonists e.g., paclitaxel
  • thromboxane A synthase inhibitors e.g., triflusal
  • antioxidants e.g., idebenone
  • alpha adrenoreceptor antagonists e.g., nicergoline
  • estrogen antagonists e.g., conjugated estrogens, trilostane
  • 3-beta hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase inhibitors e.g., trilostane
  • signal transduction pathway inhibitors e.g., trilostane
  • melatonin receptor agonists e.g., ramelteon
  • immunostimulants e.g., immune globulin, icosapentethyl ester, procaine
  • HIV entry inhibitors e.g., procaine
  • butylcholine esterase inhibitor e.g., bisnorcymserine
  • alpha adrenergic receptor antagonists e.g., nicergoline
  • NO synthase type II inhibitors e.g., arundic acid
  • chelating agents e.g., PBT 2
  • amyloid fibrillogenesis inhibitors e.g., TTP488, PF 4494700
  • serotonin 4 receptor agonists e.g., PRX 03140
  • serotonin 6 receptor antagonists e.g., SB 742457
  • benzodiazepine receptor inverse agonists e.g., radequinil
  • Ca channel antagonists e.g., safinamide
  • nicotinic receptor agonists e.g., ispronicline
  • BACE inhibitor e.g., CTS 21166
  • the above compounds include, for example, donepezil, huperzine A, tacrine, rivastigmine, galantamine, pramiracetam, aniracetam, nefiracetam, EGb 761, rosiglitazone, rasagiline, levacecarnine, celecoxib, 3-(2-cyanophenyl)-5-(2-pyridyl)-l-phenyl- l,2-dihydropyridin-2-one, talampanel, becampanel, memantine, xaliproden, tarenflurbil, tramiprosate, leuprorelin-D, taltirelin, risperidone, cevimeline, modafinil, alosetron, aripiprazole, mifepristone, atorvastatin, propentofylline, choline alfoscerate, FPF 1070 (CAS Number 143637- 01-8), rimonabant,
  • ABT 107 ABT 560, TC 5619, TAK 070, N- [(lS,2R)-3-(3,5-Difluorophenyl)-l-hydroxy-l-[(5S,6R)-5-methyl-6-(neopentyloxy)morpholin-3- yl]propan-2-yl]acetamide hydrochloride, 6-Fluoro-5-(2-fluoro-5-methylphenyl)-3,4- dihydropyridine, 2- Amino-6- [2-(3 '-methoxybiphenyl-3 -yl)ethyl] -3 ,6-dimethyl-5 ,6- hydroxypyrimidin-4(3H)-one, AZD 1080, ARA 014418, XD 4241, Z 321 (CAS No.
  • Monoclonal antibody 266 duloxetine, escitalopram oxalate, fluoxetine, fluvoxamine maleate, paroxetine, sertraline, dapoxetine, desvenlafaxine, sibutramine, nefazodone, milnacipran, desipramine, duloxetine, and bicifadine.
  • (+)-8-(4-Fluoro-2-trifluoromethylphenvn-2- ( f EV2-r6-methoxy-5-(4-methyl- 1 H-imidazol- 1 - yl)pyrazin-2-yl]vinvU-5,6,7 ⁇ 8-tetrahydro-[l .2.41triazolo[l ,5-a]pyridine and (-)-8-(4-fluoro-2- trifluoromethylphenylV2- ((E)-2-[6-methoxy-5-(4-methyl- 1 H-imidazol- 1 -yl)pyrazin-2-yl1 vinyl ) - 5,6.7.8-tetrahvdro-ri.2.41triazolo ⁇ .5-alpyridine [0191]
  • Tris(dibenzylieneacetone)dipalladium (140 mg), tri(o-tolyl)phosphine (93.1 mg) and TEA (358 uL) were added to a suspension of 8-(2,4-difiuoro-phenyl)-2-vinyl-5,6,7,8- tetrahydro[l,2,4]triazolo[l,5-a]pyridine obtained in Reference Example 5 (200 mg) and 5- bromo-3-methoxy-2-(4-methyl-lH-imidazol-l-yl)pyrazine obtained in Reference Example 1 (226 mg) in toluene (13.3 mL), followed by stirring at 110 0 C for 18 hours.
  • the solid in the reaction solution was removed by filtration through celite, and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • the resulting residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (carrier: ChromatorexTM NH manufactured by Fuji Silysia Chemical Ltd.(hereinafter abbreviated as "NH silica gel”)) to obtain 124 mg of a racemate of the title compound.
  • the resulting racemate was separated by CHIRALPAKTM IC manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.
  • the reaction mixture was brought back to room temperature, diluted with ethyl acetate and then filtered through celite. Water and brine were added to the filtrate, and the organic layer was separated. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (carrier: ChromatorexTM NH) to obtain the racemic title compound.
  • the racemic title compound was separated by CHIRALPAKTM IC manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.
  • Acetic anhydride 150 ml was added dropwise to formic acid (150 ml) under ice- cooling, followed by stirring at the same temperature for 25 minutes.
  • the property values of the compound are as follows.
  • the residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, and the eluted fraction was concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • the resulting residue was solidified with tert-butyl methyl ether, and the solid was collected by filtration.
  • the solid was washed with ether tert- butyl methyl ether-heptane (2: 1) and air-dried to obtain 20.4 g of the title compound.
  • the property values of the compound are as follows.
  • Phosphorus oxychloride (75.6 mL) was added to N-[3-(2,4-difluorophenyl)-2- oxopiperidin-l-yl]-3-p-tolylsulfanylpropionamide (3.66 g), followed by stirring at 120 0 C for one hour. Then, the reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. Ammonium acetate (6.66 g) and acetic acid (90 mL) were sequentially added to the resulting residue, and the reaction mixture was stirred at 15O 0 C for 2.5 hours. The reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. Ethyl acetate and aqueous ammonia were added to the resulting residue, and the organic layer was separated.
  • BOPCl (7.9 g) was added to a solution of 5-chloro-2-(5-isopropyl-4-methoxy-2- methylphenyl)pentanoic acid (6.2 g), tert-butyl carbazate (4.1 g) and IPEA (10.8 ml) in dichloromethane (120 ml) under ice-cooling. Then, the reaction solution was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. A sodium bicarbonate solution and tert-butyl methyl ether were added to the residue, and the organic layer was separated. The resulting organic layer was washed with brine and then dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate.
  • the neuronal cell suspension was diluted with the medium and then plated in a volume of 100 ⁇ l/well at an initial cell density of 5 x 10 5 cells/cm 2 in a 96- well polystyrene culture plate pre- coated with poly-L or D-lysine (Falcon Cat #35-3075, Becton Dickinson Labware, Franklin Lakes, NJ, USA coated with poly-L-lysine using the method shown below, or BIOCO ATTM cell environments Poly-D-lysine cell ware 96- well plate, Cat #35-6461, Becton Dickinson Labware, Franklin Lakes, NJ, USA). Poly-L-lysine coating was carried out as follows.
  • a poly-L-lysine (SIGMA P2636, St. Louis, MO, USA) solution was aseptically prepared with a 0.15 M borate buffer (pH 8.5).
  • 100 ⁇ g/well of the solution was added to the 96-well polystyrene culture plate and incubated at room temperature for one or more hours or at 4 0 C overnight or longer. Thereafter, the coated 96-well polystyrene culture plate was washed with sterile water four or more times, and then dried or rinsed with sterile PBS or medium, and used for cell plating.
  • the plated cells were cultured in the culture plate at 37°C in 5% CO 2 -95% air for one day.
  • DMSO dimethyl sulfoxide
  • the cells were cultured for three days after addition of the compound, and the total amount of the medium was collected. The resulting medium was used as an ELISA sample. [0267] Evaluation of cell survival
  • MTT MTT assay
  • 100 ⁇ l/well of a pre- warmed medium was added to the wells.
  • 8 ⁇ l/well of a solution of 8 mg/ml of MTT (SIGMA M2128, St. Louis, MO, USA) in D-PBS(-) (Dulbecco's phosphate buffered Saline, SIGMA D8537, St. Louis, MO, USA) was added to the wells.
  • the 96-well polystyrene culture plate was incubated in an incubator at 37 0 C in 5% CO 2 -95% air for 20 minutes.
  • the MTT lysis buffer was prepared as follows. 100 g of SDS (sodium dodecyl sulfate (sodium lauryl sulfate), WAKO 191-07145, Osaka, Japan) was dissolved in a mixed solution of 250 mL of N,N-dimethylformamide (WAKO 045-02916, Osaka, Japan) with 250 mL of distilled water. 350 ⁇ l each of concentrated hydrochloric acid and acetic acid were further added to the solution to allow the solution to have a final pH of about 4.7.
  • % of CTRL ((A55O_sample - A550_bkg)/(A550_CTRL - bkg)) x 100 (A550_sample: absorbance at 550 nm of sample well, A550_bkg: absorbance at 550 nm of background well, A550 CTRL: absorbance at 550 nm of control group well) [0268] A ⁇ ELISA
  • a ⁇ ELISA Human/Rat ⁇ Amyloid (42) ELISA Kit Wako (#290-62601) from Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd. or Human Amyloid beta ( 1 -42) Assay Kit (#27711 ) from IBL Co., Ltd. was used.
  • a ⁇ ELISA was carried out according to the protocols recommended by the manufacturers (methods described in the attached documents). However, the A ⁇ calibration curve was created using beta-amyloid peptide 1-42, rat (Calbiochem, #171596 [A ⁇ 42 ]). The results are shown in Table 1 as percentage to the A ⁇ concentration in the medium of the control group (% of CTRL). [0269]
  • the compound of the general formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof according to the present invention have an A ⁇ 42 production reducing effect.
  • the present invention can particularly provide a therapeutic agent for a neurodegenerative disease caused by A ⁇ such as Alzheimer's disease or Down's syndrome.
  • the compound of the general formula (I) according to the present invention has an A ⁇ production reducing effect, and thus is particularly useful as a therapeutic agent for a neurodegenerative disease caused by A ⁇ such as Alzheimer's disease or Down's syndrome.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)

Abstract

To provide a novel low-molecular-weight compound that inhibits the production of amyloid-β (Aβ ). A compound represented by the formula [I]: or a pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof, wherein R1 and R2 are the same or different and each represent a substituent selected from the following Substituent Group a1; m represents an integer of 0 to 3; n represents an integer of 0 to 2; X1 represents a single bond or the like; X2 represents a single bond or the like; Ring A represents a five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group or the like which contains two or more nitrogen atoms and may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the following Substituent Group b1; and Ring B represents a monocyclic or fused cyclic aromatic ring group such as the formula [2] which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the following Substituent Group c1, is effective as a therapeutic agent for a disease such as Alzheimer's disease. Substituent Group a1: a C1-6 alkyl group and the like Substituent Group b1: a C1-6 alkyl group and the like Substituent Group c1: an amino group and the like

Description

DESCRIPTION
TITLE OF THE INVENTION: IMIDAZOLYLPYRAZINE DERIVATIVES
TECHNICAL FIELD [0001]
The present invention relates to a pharmaceutical, more particularly, to a polycyclic imidazolylpyrazine derivative effective for the treatment of a neurodegenerative disease caused by amyloid-β (hereinafter referred to as Aβ) such as Alzheimer's disease or Down's syndrome and a medicine, in particular, a medicine for the treatment of a disease caused by Aβ comprising the compound as an active ingredient.
BACKGROUND ART [0002]
Alzheimer's disease is a disease characterized by degeneration and loss of neurons as well as formation of senile plaques and neurofibrillary degeneration. Currently, Alzheimer's disease is treated only with symptomatic treatment using a symptom improving agent typified by an acetylcholinesterase inhibitor, and a fundamental remedy to inhibit progression of the disease has not yet been developed. It is necessary to develop a method for controlling the cause of the onset of pathology in order to create a fundamental remedy for Alzheimer's disease.
It is assumed that Aβ-proteins as metabolites of amyloid precursor proteins (hereinafter referred to as APP) are highly involved in degeneration and loss of neurons and onset of symptoms of dementia (see NON-PATENT DOCUMENTS 1 and 2, for example). Main molecular species of Aβ-protein are Aβ40 consisting of 40 amino acids and Aβ42 with two amino acids added at the C-terminal. The Aβ40 and Aβ42 are known to have high aggregability (see NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 3, for example) and to be main components of senile plaques (see NON-PATENT DOCUMENTS 3, 4 and 5, for example). Further, it is known that the Aβ40 and Aβ42 are increased by mutation in APP and presenilin genes which is observed in familial Alzheimer's disease (see NON-PATENT DOCUMENTS 6, 7 and 8, for example). Accordingly, a compound that reduces the production of Aβ40 and Aβ42 is expected as a progression inhibitor or prophylactic agent for Alzheimer's disease. Aβ is produced by cleaving APP by β-secretase and subsequently by γ-secretase.
For this reason, attempts have been made to create γ-secretase and β-secretase inhibitors in order to reduce Aβ production. Many of these secretase inhibitors already known are, for example, peptides and peptide mimetics such as L-685,458 (see NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 9, for example), LY-411,575 (see NON-PATENT DOCUMENTS 10, 11 and 12, for example) and LY- 450,139 (see NON-PATENT DOCUMENTS 13, 14 and 15). Nonpeptidic compounds are, for example, MRK-560 (see NON-PATENT DOCUMENTS 16 and 17) and compounds having a plurality of aromatic rings as disclosed in PATENT DOCUMENTS 1 and 2. However, the compound represented by the formula (VI) as disclosed in page 17 of the specification differs from the compound of the present invention in that the compound is limited to a compound having a 2-aminothiazolyl group as a main structure. And the compound represented by the formula (I) as disclosed in page 6 of the specification of PATENT DOCUMENT 2 differs from the compound of the present invention in that the former compound does not have pyrazine ring in the partial structure defined as Aτ2.
PRIORART DOCUMENTS PATENT DOCUMENTS [0003]
PATENT DOCUMENT 1: WO 2004/110350 PATENT DOCUMENT 2: WO 2007/102580
NON-PATENT DOCUMENTS
[0004] NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 1 : Klein WL, and seven others, Alzheimer's disease-affected brain:
Presence of oligomeric Aβ ligands (ADDLs) suggests a molecular basis for reversible memory loss, Proceeding of the National Academy of Science USA, 2003, Sep, 2; 100 (18), p. 10417-
10422.
NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 2: Nitsch RM, and sixteen others, Antibodies against β-amyloid slow cognitive decline in Alzheimer's disease, Neuron, 2003, May 22; 38, p. 547-554.
NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 3: Jarrett JT, and two others, The carboxy terminus of the β amyloid PROTEIN is critical for the seeding of amyloid formation: Implications for the pathogenesis of Alzheimers1 disease, Biochemistry, 1993, 32 (18), p. 4693-4697.
NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 4: Glenner GG1 and one other, Alzheimer's disease: initial report of the purification and characterization of a novel cerebrovascular amyloid protein, Biochemical and Biophysical Research Communications, 1984, May 16, 120 (3), p. 885-890.
NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 5: Masters CL, and five others, Amyloid plaque core protein in Alzheimer disease and Down syndrome, Proceeding of the National Academy of Science USA, 1985, Jun, 82 (12), p. 4245-4249.
NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 6: Gouras GK, and eleven others, Intraneural Aβ42 accumulation in human brain, American Journal of Pathology, 2000, Jan, 156 (1), p. 15-20. NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 7: Scheuner D, and twenty others, Secreted amyloid β-protein similar to that in the senile plaques of Alzheimer's disease is increased in vivo by the presenilin 1 and 2 and APP mutations linked to familial Alzheimer's disease, Nature Medicine, 1996, Aug, 2 (8), p. 864-870. NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 8: Forman MS, and four others, Differential effects of the Swedish mutant amyloid precursor protein on β-amyloid accumulation and secretion in neurons and nonneuronal cells, The Journal of Biological Chemistry, 1997, Dec, 19, 272 (51), p. 32247- 32253.
NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 9: Shearman MS, and nine others, L-685, 458, an Aspartyl Protease Transition State Mimic, Is a Potent Inhibitor of Amyloid β-Protein Precursor γ- Secretase Activity, Biochemistry, 2000, Aug, 1 , 39 (30), p. 8698-8704.
NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 10: Shearman MS, and six others, Catalytic Site-Directed γ- Secretase Complex Inhibitors Do Not Discriminate Pharmacologically between Notch S3 and β- APP Clevages, Biochemistry, 2003, Jun, 24, 42 (24), p. 7580-7586. NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 11 : Lanz TA, and three others, Studies of Aβ pharmacodynamics in the brain, cerebrospinal fluid, and plasma in young (plaque-free) Tg2576 mice using the γ- secretase inhibitor N2-[(2S)-2-(3,5-difluorophenyl)-2-hydroxyethanoyl]-Nl-[(7S)-5-methyl-6- oxo-6,7-dihydro-5H-dibenzo[b,d]azepin-7-yl]-L-alaninamide (LY-411575), The Journal of Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics, 2004, Apr, 309 (1), p. 49-55. NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 12: Wong GT, and twelve others, Chronic treatment with the γ- secretase inhibitor LY-411, 575 inhibits β-amyloid peptide production and alters lymphopoiesis and intestinal cell differentiation, The Journal of Biological Chemistry, 2004, Mar, 26, 279 (13), p. 12876-12882.
NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 13: Gitter BD, and ten others, Stereoselective inhibition of amyloid beta peptide secretion by LY450139, a novel functional gamma secretase inhibitor, Neurology of Aging 2004, 25, sup2, p. 571.
NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 14: Lanz TA, and eighteen others, Concentration-dependent modulation of amyloid- β in vivo and in vitro using the γ-secretase inhibitor, LY-450139, The Journal of Pharmacology and Experimantal Therapeutics, 2006, Nov, 319 (2) p. 924-933. NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 15: Siemers ER, and thirteen others, Effects of a γ-secretase inhibitor in a randamized study of patients with Alzheimer disease, Neurology, 2006, 66, p. 602- 604.
NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 16: Best JD, and nine others, In vivo characterization of Aβ (40) changes in brain and cerebrospinal fluid using the novel γ-secretase inhibitor N-[cis-4-[(4- chlorophenyl)sulfonyl]-4-(2,5-difluorophenyl)cyclohexyl]- 1 ,1,1 -trifiuoromethanesulphonlamide (MK-560) in the rat, The Journal of Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics, 2006, May 317 (2) p. 786-790.
NON-PATENT DOCUMENT 17: Best JD, and thirteen others The novel γ-secretase inhibitor N- [cis-4-[(4-chlorophenyl)sulfonyl]-4-(2,5-difluorophenyl)cyclohexyl]- 1 ,1,1- trifluoromethanesulphonlamide (MK-560) reduces amylid plaque deposition without evidence notch-related pathology in the Tg2576 mouse, The Journal of Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics, 2007, Feb, 320 (2) p. 552-558.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED BY THE INVENTION
[0005]
As described above, a compound that inhibits the production of Aβ40 and Aβ42 from APP has been expected as a therapeutic or prophylactic agent for a disease caused by Aβ which is typified by Alzheimer's disease. However, a nonpeptidic compound having high efficacy which inhibits the production of Aβ40 and Aβ42 has not yet been known.
Accordingly, there is a need for a novel low-molecular-weight compound that inhibits the production of Aβ40 and Aβ42.
MEANS FOR SOLVING THE PROBLEM
[0006] As a result of extensive studies, the present inventors have found a nonpeptidic polycyclic compound that inhibits the production of Aβ40 and Aβ42 from APP and thus found a therapeutic agent for a disease caused by Aβ which is typified by Alzheimer's disease. This finding has led to the accomplishment of the present invention.
[0007] Specifically, the present invention relates to the following 1) to 20):
1 ) A compound represented by the formula [FJ : [0008]
Figure imgf000006_0001
[0009] or a pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof, wherein Rj and R2 are the same or different and each represent a substituent selected from the following Substituent Group al ; m represents an integer of 0 to 3; n represents an integer of 0 to 2; X1 represents i) a single bond, ii) [0010]
— C≡C— [0011] or iii) -CR3=CR4- (wherein R3 and R4 are the same or different and each represent (1) a hydrogen atom, (2) a C 1-6 alkyl group or (3) a halogen atom);
X2 represents i) a single bond, ii) a Cl -6 alkylene group or iii) -X3- (wherein X3 represents -NR5- , -O-, -C(O)-, -S-, -S(O)- or -S(O)2- and R5 represents a hydrogen atom, a C 1-6 alkyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C2-6 alkanoyl group or a C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group);
Ring A represents i) a fϊve-membered aromatic heterocyclic group or ii) a five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group fused with a 5- to 14-membered non-aromatic ring group, which contains two or more nitrogen atoms and may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the following Substituent Group bl (wherein the non-aromatic ring group may have a crosslinked structure or a spiro ring system); and
Ring B represents a monocyclic or fused cyclic aromatic ring group selected from the group consisting of the formulas [2] to [19]: [0012]
Figure imgf000007_0001
[0013] each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the following Substituent Group cl, Substituent Group al: a Cl-6 alkyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C2-6 alkenyl group, a Cl-6 alkoxy group, a C2-6 alkenyloxy group, a C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group, an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group or Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 Cl-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), a cyano group, a formyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group and a nitro group; Substituent Group bl : a Cl-6 alkyl group (wherein the alkyl group may be substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms), a C2-6 alkenyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C6-14 aryl group, a C6-14 aryl-Cl-6 alkyl group, a Cl-6 alkoxy group, a C2-6 alkenyloxy group, a C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group, a C2-6 alkanoyl group, a C4-9 cycloalkylcarbonyl group, a C7-15 aroyl group, a Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group, a C2-6 alkenylsulfonyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group, a C6-14 arylsulfonyl group, a Cl-6 alkylthio group, a C2-6 alkenylthio group, a C3-8 cycloalkylthio group, an aminosulfonyl group (wherein the aminosulfonyl group may have 1 to 2 Cl-6 alkyl groups, C2-6 alkenyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group, Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group or C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 Cl-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), a cyano group, a formyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, an oxo group, a 1-pyrrolidinyl group, a 1- piperidinyl group, a 1-homopiperidinyl group, an indolin-1-yl group, a 1,2,3,4- tetrahydroquinolin-1-yl group and a 4-morpholinyl group;
Substituent Group cl : i) an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group, Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group or C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 Cl-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), ii) a cyano group, iii) a halogen atom, iv) a hydroxyl group and v) v)-i) a Cl-6 alkyl group, v)-ii) a C2-6 alkenyl group, v)-iii) a C2-6 alkynyl group, v)-iv) a Cl-6 alkoxy group, v)-v) a Cl-6 alkylthio group, v)-vi) a Cl-6 alkylaminocarbonyl group, v)-vii) a C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group, v)-viii) a C 1-6 alkylaminosulfonyl group, v)-ix) a C2-6 alkanoyl group, v)-x) a phenyl group, v)-xi) a pyridyl group, v)-xii) a pyridazinyl group, v)-xiii) a pyrimidinyl group, v)-xiv) a 1-pyrrolidinyl group, v)-xv) a 1-piperidinyl group, v)-xvi) a 1- homopiperidinyl group and v)-xvii) a 4-moφholinyl group, each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of a C 1-6 alkyl group and a halogen atom;
2) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to
1) above, wherein Ring A is a rive-membered aromatic heterocyclic group selected from the group consisting of the formulas [20] to [26]: [0014]
Figure imgf000008_0001
20 21 22 23
Figure imgf000008_0002
24 25 ' 26 [0015] wherein • represents a bonding site to the formula [27]: [0016]
Figure imgf000008_0003
[0017]
A* represents a bonding site to X2, or any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [28] to [39]: [0018]
Figure imgf000009_0001
[0019] wherein • and A* are as defined above and the partial structure:
[0020]
[0021] represents a single bond or a double bond, each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from Substituent Group bl; 3) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to
2) above, wherein Ring A is any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [21], [28], [29], [31], [32] and [34] to [37]: [0022]
Figure imgf000009_0002
34 y 35 A- wherein •, A* and the partial structure: [0023]
[0024] are as defined above;
4) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to
2) above, wherein Ring A is any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [21],
[28-1], [29-1], [31-1], [32-1] and [34-1] to [37-1]:
[0025]
Figure imgf000010_0001
[0026] wherein •, A* and the partial structure: [0027]
[0028] are as defined above;
5) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to
2) above, wherein Ring A is a ring of the formula [28-1]: [0029]
Figure imgf000010_0002
28-1
[0030] wherein •, A* and the partial structure: [0031]
[0032] are as defined above; 6) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to
1) above, wherein Ring B is a phenyl group, a pyridyl group, an oxazolyl group, an imidazolyl group, a thiazolyl group, a dihydrobenzofuranyl group or a thienyl group; 7) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to
1) above, wherein X1 is i) a single bond or ii) -CR3=CR4-; 8) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to
1) above, wherein X1 is a single bond;
9) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to 1) above, wherein X1 is -CR3=CR4-;
10) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to 1) above, wherein X2 is i) a single bond or ii) a Cl-6 alkylene group;
11) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to 1) above, wherein X2 is a single bond;
12) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to 1) above, wherein Ri is a Cl-6 alkyl group or a halogen atom and m is 1 to 2; 13) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to
1) above, wherein R2 is a Cl-6 alkoxy group and n is 1;
14) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to
9) above, wherein R3 and R4 are the same or different and are each (1) a hydrogen atom or (2) a halogen atom; 15) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to
9) above, wherein R3 and R4 are each a hydrogen atom;
16) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to
1), wherein the substituent for Ring A is a substituent selected from the group consisting of: a Cl-6 alkyl group (wherein the alkyl group may be substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms), a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C6-14 aryl group, a C6-14 aryl-Cl-6 alkyl group, a Cl-6 alkoxy group, a C3- 8 cycloalkyloxy group, a C2-6 alkanoyl group, a C7-15 aroyl group, a Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group, a C6-14 arylsulfonyl group, a cyano group, a formyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group and an oxo group; 17) The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to 1), wherein the substituent for Ring B is a substituent selected from the group consisting of: i) an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group, C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group or C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 Cl-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), ii) a cyano group, iii) a halogen atom, iv) a hydroxyl group and v) v)-i) a Cl-6 alkyl group, v)-ii) a Cl-6 alkoxy group, v)-iii) a Cl-6 alkylthio group and v)-iv) a phenyl group, each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of a Cl-6 alkyl group and a halogen atom;
18) One compound selected from the group consisting of the following formulas [A- 1] to [A-7]:
[0033]
Figure imgf000012_0001
[0034] or a pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof;
19) A medicine comprising the compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to any one of 1) to 18) above as an active ingredient; and 20) The medicine according to 19) above for the treatment of a disease selected from
Alzheimer's disease, dementia, Down's syndrome and amyloidosis.
MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
[0035]
The compound of the general formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to the present invention and the therapeutic agent for a disease caused by
Aβ according to the present invention are novel inventions that have not yet been described in any documents.
The compound of the present invention can be converted to a chemical probe for capturing a target protein in a bioactive low-molecular compound. Specifically, the compound of the present invention can be converted to an affinity chromatography probe, a photoaffinity probe or the like by introducing a labeling group, a linker or the like into a moiety differing from a structural moiety essential for expression of activity of the compound by a technique described in J. Mass Spectrum. Soc. Jpn. Vol. 51, No. 5, 2003, p. 492-498 or WO 2007/139149, for example. Examples of the labeling group, the linker or the like used for the chemical probe include groups shown in the following group consisting of (1) to (5):
(1) protein labeling groups such as photoaffinity labeling groups (such as a benzoyl group, a benzophenone group, an azido group, a carbonylazido group, a diaziridine group, an enone group, a diazo group and a nitro group) and chemical affinity groups (such as a ketone group substituted at the α-carbon atom with a halogen atom, a carbamoyl group, an ester group, an alkylthio group, Michael acceptors such as α,β-unsaturated ketones and esters, and an oxirane group),
(2) cleavable linkers such as -S-S-, -0-Si-O-, monosaccharides (such as a glucose group and a galactose group) and disaccharides (such as lactose), and enzymatically cleavable oligopeptide linkers,
(3) fishing tag groups such as biotin and 3-(4,4-difluoro-5,7-dimethyl-4H-3a,4a- diaza-4-bora-s-indacen-3-yl)propionyl,
(4) detectable markers such as radioactive labeling groups such as 1251, 32P, 3H and 14C; fluorescence labeling groups such as fluorescein, rhodamine, dansyl, umbelliferone, 7- mtrofurazanyl and 3-(4,4-difluoro-5,7-dimethyl-4H-3a,4a-diaza-4-bora-s-indacen-3- yl)propionyl; chemiluminescent groups such as luciferin and luminol; and heavy metal ions such as lanthanoid metal ions and radium ions, and (5) groups bound to solid-phase carriers such as glass beads, glass beds, microtiter plates, agarose beads, agarose beds, polystyrene beads, polystyrene beds, nylon beads and nylon beds.
When a probe is prepared by introducing a labeling group or the like selected from the group consisting of (1) to (5) above into the compound of the present invention in accordance with a method described in the above documents or the like, the probe can be used as a chemical probe for identification of labeled proteins useful for searching for novel drug targets, for example. [0036]
Meanings of symbols, terms and the like used in the present specification will be explained and the present invention will be described in detail below. [0037]
In the present specification, a structural formula of a compound may represent a certain isomer for convenience. However, the present invention includes all isomers and isomer mixtures such as geometric isomers which can be generated from the structure of a compound, optical isomers based on asymmetric carbon, stereoisomers and tautomers. The present invention is not limited to the description of a chemical formula for convenience and may include any one of the isomers or mixtures thereof. Accordingly, the compound of the present invention may have an asymmetric carbon atom in the molecule and exist as an optically active compound or racemate, and the present invention includes each of the optically active compound and the racemate without limitations. Although crystal polymorphs of the compound may be present, the compound is not limited thereto as well and may be present as a single crystal form or a mixture of single crystal forms. The compound may be an anhydride or hydrate.
The present invention also includes isotopically-labelled compounds, which are identical to the compounds of formula (I), except that one or more atoms are replaced by an atom having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number uusually found in nature. Examples of isotopes that can be incorporated into compounds of the invention include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine, iodine, and chlorine, such as 2H, 3H, 11C, 14C, 18F, 35S, 123I and 125I. Compounds of the present invention and pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives (e.g. salts) of said compounds that contain the aforementioned isotopes and/or other isotopes of other atoms are within the scope of the present invention. Isotopically— labelled compounds of the present invention, for example those into which radioactive isotopes such as 3H and/or 14C are incorporated, are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distribution assays. 3H and 14C are considered useful due to their ease of preparation and detectability. 11C and 18F isotopes are considered useful in PET (positron emission tomography), and 125I isotopes are considered useful in SPECT (single photon emission computerized tomography), all useful in brain imaging. Substitution with heavier isotopes such as 2H can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, are considered useful in some circumstances. Isotopically labelled compounds of formula (I) of this invention can generally be prepared by carrying out the procedures disclosed in the Schemes and/or in the Examples below, by substituting a readily available isotopically labelled reagent for a non-isotopically labelled reagent. [0038]
The term "diseases attributable to Aβ" includes a wide variety of conditions such as Alzheimer's disease (for example, refer to, Klein WL, and 7 others, Alzheimer's disease- affected brain: Presence of oligomeric Aβ ligands (ADDLs) suggests a molecular basis for reversible memory loss, Proceeding National Academy of Science USA, 2003, Sep 2, 100 (18), p. 10417-10422; Nitsch RM, and 16 others, Antibodies against β-amyloid slow cognitive decline in Alzheimer's disease, Neuron, 2003, May 22, 38 (4), p. 547-554: Jarrett JT, and 2 others, The carboxy terminus of the β amyloid protein is critical for the seeding of amyloid formation: Implications for the pathogenesis of Alzheimer's disease, Biochemistry, 1993, May 11, 32 (18), p. 4693-4697; Glenner GQ and another, Alzheimer's disease; initial report of the purification and characterization of a novel cerebrovascular amyloid protein, Biochemical and biophysical research communications, 1984, May 16, 120 (3), p. 885-890; Masters CL, and 6 others, Amyloid plaque core protein in Alzheimer disease and Down syndrome, Proceeding National Academy of Science USA, 1985, June, 82 (12), p. 4245-4249; Gouras GK, and 11 others, Intraneuronal Aβ42 accumulation in human brain, American journal of pathology, 2000, Jan, 156 (1), p. 15-20; Scheuner D, and 20 others, Secreted amyloid β-protein similar to that in the senile plaques of Alzheimer's disease is increased in vivo by the presenilin 1 and 2 and APP mutations linked to familial Alzheimer's disease, Nature Medicine, 1996, Aug, 2 (8), p. 864-870; Forman MS, and 4 others, Differential effects of the Swedish mutant amyloid precursor protein on β- amyloid accumulation and secretion in neurons and nonneuronal cells, The journal of biological chemistry, 1997, Dec 19, 272 (51), p. 32247-32253), senile dementia (for example, refer to, Blass JP, Brain metabolism and brain disease: Is metabolic deficiency the proximate cause of Alzheimer dementia? Journal of Neuroscience Research, 2001, Dec 1, 66 (5), p. 851-856), frontotemporal dementia (for example, refer to, Evin G, and 11 others, Alternative transcripts of presenilin-1 associated with frontotemporal dementia, Neuroreport, 2002, Apr 16, 13 (5), p. 719- 723), Pick disease (for example, refer to, Yasuhara O, and 3 others, Accumulation of amyloid precursor protein in brain lesions of patients with Pick disease, Neuroscience Letters, 1994, Apr 25, 171 (1-2), p. 63-66), Down's syndrome (for example, refer to, Teller JK, and 10 others, Presence of soluble amyloid β-peptide precedes amyloid plaque formation in Down's syndrome, Nature Medicine, 1996, Jan, 2 (1), p. 93-95; Tokuda T, and 6 others, Plasma levels of amyloid β proteins Aβ 1-40 and Aβ 1-42 (43) are elevated in Down's syndrome, Annals of Neurology, 1997, Feb, 41 (2), p. 271-273), cerebrovascular angiopathy (for example, refer to, Hayashi Y, and 9 others, Evidence for presenilin-1 involvement in amyloid angiopathy in the Alzheimer's disease- affected brain, Brain Research, 1998, Apr 13, 789 (2), p. 307-314; Barelli H, and 15 others,
Characterization of new polyclonal antibodies specific for 40 and 42 amino acid-long amyloid β peptides: their use to examine the cell biology of presenilins and the immunohistochernistry of sporadic Alzheimer's disease and cerebral amyloid angiopathy cases, Molecular Medicine, 1997, Oct, 3 (10), p. 695-707; Calhoun ME, and 10 others, Neuronal overexpression of mutant amyloid precursor protein results in prominent deposition of cerebrovascular amyloid, Proceeding
National Academy of Science USA, 1999, Nov 23, 96 (24), p. 14088-14093; Dermaut B, and 10 others, Cerebral amyloid angiopathy is a pathogenic lesion in Alzheimer's Disease due to a novel presenilin-1 mutation, Brain, 2001, Dec, 124 (12), p. 2383-2392), hereditary cerebral hemorrhage with amyloidosis (Dutch type) (for example, refer to, Cras P, and 9 others, Presenile Alzheimer dementia characterized by amyloid angiopathy and large amyloid core type senile plaques in the APP 692AIa --> GIy mutation, Acta Neuropathology (Berl), 1998, Sep, 96 (3), p. 253-260; Herzig MC, and 14 others, Aβ is targeted to the vasculature in a mouse model of hereditary cerebral hemorrhage with amyloidosis, Nature Neuroscience, 2004, Sep, 7 (9), p. 954- 960; van Duinen SG, and 5 others, Hereditary cerebral hemorrhage with amyloidosis in patients of Dutch origin is related to Alzheimer disease, Proceeding National Academy of Science USA, 1987, Aug, 84 (16), p. 5991-5994; Levy E, and 8 others, Mutation of the Alzheimer's disease amyloid gene in hereditary cerebral hemorrhage, Dutch type, Science, 1990, Jun 1, 248 (4959), p. 1124-1126), cognitive impairment (for example, refer to, Laws SM, and 7 others, Association between the presenilin-1 mutation Glu318Gly and complaints of memory impairment, Neurobiology of Aging, 2002, Jan-Feb, 23 (1), p. 55-58), memory disturbance/learning disturbance (for example, refer to, Vaucher E, and 5 others, Object recognition memory and cholinergic parameters in mice expressing human presenilin 1 transgenes, Experimental Neurology, 2002 Jun, 175 (2), p. 398-406; Morgan D, and 14 others, Aβ peptide vaccination prevents memory loss in an animal model of Alzheimer's disease, Nature, 2000 Dec 21-28, 408 (6815), p. 982-985; Moran PM, and 3 others, Age-related learning deficits in transgenic mice expressing the 751 -amino acid isoform of human β-amyloid precursor protein, Proceeding National Academy of Science USA, 1995, June 6, 92 (12), p. 5341-5345), amyloidosis, cerebral ischemia (for example, refer to, Laws SM, and 7 others, Association between the presenilin- 1 mutation Glu318GIy and complaints of memory impairment, Neurobiology of Aging, 2002, Jan- Feb, 23 (1), p. 55-58; Koistinaho M, and 10 others, β-amyloid precursor protein transgenic mice that harbor diffuse Aβ deposits but do not form plaques show increased ischemic vulnerability: Role of inflammation, Proceeding National Academy of Science USA, 2002, Feb 5, 99 (3), p. 1610-1615; Zhang F, and 4 others, Increased susceptibility to ischemic brain damage in transgenic mice overexpressing the amyloid precursor protein, The journal of neuroscience,
1997, Oct 15, 17 (20), p. 7655-7661), cerebrovascular dementia (for example, refer to, Sadowski M, and 6 others, Links between the pathology of Alzheimer's disease and vascular dementia, Neurochemical Research, 2004, Jun, 29 (6), p. 1257-1266), ophthalmoplegia (for example, refer to, O'Riordan S, and 7 others, Presenilin- 1 mutation (E280G), spastic paraparesis, and cranial MRI white-matter abnormalities, Neurology, 2002, Oct 8, 59 (7), p. 1108- 1110), multiple sclerosis (for example, refer to, Gehrmann J, and 4 others, Amyloid precursor protein (APP) expression in multiple sclerosis lesions, GHa, 1995, Oct, 15 (2), p. 141-51; Reynolds WF, and 6 others, Myeloperoxidase polymorphism is associated with gender specific risk for Alzheimer's disease, Experimental Neurology, 1999, Jan, 155 (1), p. 31-41), head injury, skull damage (for example, refer to, Smith DH, and 4 others, Protein accumulation in traumatic brain injury,
NeuroMolecular Medicine, 2003, 4 (1-2), p. 59-72), apraxia (for example, refer to, Matsubara- Tsutsui M, and 7 others, Molecular evidence of presenilin 1 mutation in familial early onset dementia, American journal of Medical Genetics, 2002, Apr 8, 114 (3), p. 292-298), prion disease, familial amyloid neuropathy, triplet repeat disease (for example, refer to, Kirkitadze MD, and 2 others, Paradigm shifts in Alzheimer's disease and other neurodegenerative disorders: the emerging role of oligomeric assemblies, Journal of Neuroscience Research, 2002, Sep 1, 69 (5), p. 567-577; Evert BO, and 8 others, Inflammatory genes are upreglulated in expanded ataxin-3 -expressing cell lines and spinocerebellar ataxia type 3 brains, The Journal of Neuroscience, 2001, Aug 1, 21 (15), p. 5389-5396; Mann DM, and another, Deposition of amyloid (A4) protein within the brains of persons with dementing disorders other than Alzheimer's disease and Down's syndrome, Neuroscience Letters, 1990, Feb 5, 109 (1-2), p. 68- 75), Parkinson's disease (for example, refer to, Primavera J, and 4 others, Brain accumulation of amyloid-β in Non- Alzheimer Neurodegeneration, Journal of Alzheimer's Disease, 1999, Oct, 1 (3), p. 183-193), Dementia with Lewy bodies (for example, refer to, Giasson BI, and 2 others, Interactions of amyloidogenic proteins. NeuroMolecular Medicine, 2003, 4 (1-2), p. 49-58; Masliah E, and 6 others, β-amyloid peptides enhance α-synuclein accumulation and neuronal deficits in a transgenic mouse model linking Alzheimer's disease and Parkinson's disease, Proceeding National Academy of Science USA, 2001, Oct 9, 98 (21), p. 12245-12250; Barrachina M, and 6 others, Amyloid-β deposition in the cerebral cortex in Dementia with Lewy bodies is accompanied by a relative increase in AβPP mRNA isoforms containing the Kunitz protease inhibitor, Neurochemistry International, 2005, Feb, 46 (3), p. 253-260; Primavera J, and 4 others, Brain accumulation of amyloid-β in Non- Alzheimer Neurodegeneration, Journal of Alzheimer's Disease, 1999, Oct, 1 (3), p. 183-193), Parkinsonism-dementia complex (for example, refer to, Schmidt ML, and 6 others, Amyloid plaques in Guam amyotrophic lateral sclerosis/ parkinsonism-dementia complex contain species of Aβ similar to those found in the amyloid plaques of Alzheimer's disease and pathological aging, Acta Neuropathologica (Berl), 1998, Feb, 95 (2), p. 117-122; Ito H, and 3 others, Demonstration of β amyloid protein- containing neurofibrillary tangles in parkinsonism-dementia complex on Guam, Neuropathology and applied neurobiology, 1991, Oct, 17 (5), p. 365-373), frontotemporal dementia and Parkinsonism linked to chromosome 17 (for example, refer to, Rosso SM, and 3 others, Coexistent tau andamyloid pathology in hereditary frontotemporal dementia with tau mutations, Annals of the New York academy of sciences, 2000, 920, p. 115-119), Dementia with argyrophilic grains (for example, refer to, Tolnay M, and 4 others, Low amyloid (Aβ) plaque load and relative predominance of diffuse plaques distinguish argyrophilic grain disease from Alzheimer's disease, Neuropathology and applied neurobiology, 1999, Aug, 25 (4), p. 295-305), Niemann-Pick disease (for example, refer to, Jin LW, and 3 others, Intracellular accumulation of amyloidogenic fragments of amyloid-β precursor protein in neurons with Niemann-Pick type C defects is associated with endosomal abnormalities, American Journal of Pathology, 2004, Mar, 164 (3), p. 975-985), amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (for example, refer to, Sasaki S, and another, Immunoreactivity of β-amyloid precursor protein in amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Acta Neuropathologica (Berl), 1999, May, 97 (5), p. 463-468; Tamaoka A, and 4 others, Increased amyloid β protein in the skin of patients with amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Journal of neurology, 2000, Aug, 247 (8), p. 633-635; Hamilton RL, and another, Alzheimer disease pathology in amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Acta Neuropathologica, 2004, Jun, 107 (6), p. 515-522; Turner BJ, and 6 others, Brain β-amyloidaccumulation in transgenic mice expressing mutant superoxide dismutase 1, Neurochemical Research, 2004, Dec, 29 (12), p. 2281-2286), hydrocephalus (for example, refer to, Weller RO, Pathology of cerebrospinal fluid and interstitial fluid of the CNS: Significance for Alzheimer's disease, prion disorders and multiple sclerosis, Journal of Neuropathology and Experimental Neurology, 1998, Oct, 57 (10), p. 885-894; Silverberg GD, and 4 others, Alzheimer's disease, normal-pressure hydrocephalus, and senescent changes in CSF circulatory physiology: a hypothesis, Lancet neurology, 2003, Aug, 2 (8), p. 506-511; Weller RO, and 3 others, Cerebral amyloid angiopathy: Accumulation of Aβ in interstitial fluid drainage pathways in Alzheimer's disease, Annals of the New York academy of sciences, 2000, Apr, 903, p. 110-117; Yow HY, and another, A role for cerebrovascular disease in determining the pattern of β-amyloid deposition in Alzheimer's disease, Neurology and applied neurobiology, 2002, 28, p. 149; Weller RO, and 4 others, Cerebrovascular disease is a major factor in the failure of elimination of Aβ from the aging human brain, Annals of the New York academy of sciences, 2002, Nov, 977, p. 162-168), paraparesis (for example, refer to, O'Riordan S, and 7 others, Presenilin-1 mutation (E280G), spastic paraparesis, and cranial MRI white-matter abnormalities, Neurology, 2002, Oct 8, 59 (7), p. 1108-1110; Matsubara-Tsutsui M, and 7 others, Molecular evidence of presenilin 1 mutation in familial early onset dementia, American journal of Medical Genetics, 2002, Apr 8, 114 (3), p. 292-298; Smith MJ, and 11 others, Variable phenotype of Alzheimer's disease with spastic paraparesis, Annals of Neurology, 2001, 49 (1), p. 125-129; Crook R, and 17 others, A variant of Alzheimer's disease with spastic pararesis and unusual plaques due to deletion of exon 9 of presenilin 1, Nature Medicine, 1998, Apr;4 (4), p. 452-455), progressive supranuclear palsy (for example, refer to, Barrachina M, and 6 others, Amyloid-β deposition in the cerebral cortex in Dementia with Lewy bodies is accompanied by a relative increase in AβPP mRNA isoforms containing the Kunitz protease inhibitor, Neurochemistry International, 2005, Feb, 46 (3), p. 253-260; Primavera J, and 4 others, Brain accumulation of amyloid-β in Non- Alzheimer Neurodegeneration, Journal of Alzheimer's Disease, 1999, Oct, 1 (3), p. 183-193), cerebral hemorrhage (for example, refer to, Atwood CS, and 3 others, Cerebrovascular requirement for sealant, anti-coagulant and remodeling molecules that allow for the maintenance of vascular integrity and blood supply, Brain Research Reviews, 2003, Sep, 43 (1), p. 164-78; Lowenson JD, and 2 others, Protein aging: Extracellular amyloid formation and intracellular repair, Trends in cardiovascular medicine, 1994, 4 (1), p. 3-8), spasm (for example, refer to, Singleton AB, and 13 others, Pathology of early-onset Alzheimer's disease cases bearing the Thrll3-114ins presenilin-1 mutation, Brain, 2000, Dec, 123 (Ptl2), p. 2467-2474), mild cognitive impairment (for example, refer to, Gattaz WF, and 4 others, Platelet phospholipase A2 activity in Alzheimer's disease and mild cognitive impairment, Journal of Neural Transmission, 2004, May, 111 (5), p. 591-601; Assini A, and M others, Plasma levels of amyloid β-protein 42 are increased in women with mild cognitive impariment, Neurology, 2004, Sep 14, 63 (5), p. 828-831), arteriosclerosis (for example, refer to, De Meyer GR, and 8 others, Platelet phagocytosis and processing of β-amyloid precursor protein as a mechanism of macrophage activation in atherosclerosis, Circulation Reserach, 2002, Jun 14, 90 (11), p. 1197-1204). [0039]
Various definitions in the present specification will be described below. [0040]
Ri and R2 are the same or different and each represent a substituent selected from the following Substituent Group al . [0041]
The "Substituent Group al" refers to a group consisting of a C 1-6 alkyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C2-6 alkenyl group, a C 1-6 alkoxy group, a C2-6 alkenyloxy group, a C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group, an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 acyl group or C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 C 1-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), a cyano group, a formyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group and a nitro group. Among these, a Cl-6 alkyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a Cl-6 alkoxy group and a C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group are preferable, and a Cl-6 alkyl group, a halogen atom and a Cl-6 alkoxy group are particularly preferable. [0042] m represents an integer of 0 to 3 and is preferably 0 to 2, and particularly preferably 1 to 2. [0043] n represents an integer of 0 to 2 and is preferably 0 to 1, and particularly preferably 1. [0044]
Xi represents i) a single bond, ii) [0045]
— C≡C— [0046] or iii) -CR3=CR4- (wherein R3 and R4 are the same or different and each represent (1) a hydrogen atom, (2) a Cl-6 alkyl group or (3) a halogen atom).
X2 represents i) a single bond, ii) a Cl-6 alkylene group or iii) -X3- (wherein X3 represents -NR5-
, -O-, -C(O)-, -S-, -S(O)- or -S(O)2- and R5 represents a hydrogen atom, a Cl-6 alkyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C2-6 alkanoyl group or a Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group), and is preferably i) a single bond or ii)
Figure imgf000021_0001
[0047]
Ring A represents i) a five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group or ii) a five- membered aromatic heterocyclic group fused with a 5- to 14-membered non-aromatic ring group, which contains two or more nitrogen atoms and may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the following Substituent Group bl (wherein the non-aromatic ring group may have a crosslinked structure or a spiro ring system).
[0048]
The "five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group" is not particularly limited insofar as it is a five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group containing two or more nitrogen atoms. The group preferably refers to a five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group selected from the group consisting of the formulas [20] to [26]:
[0049]
Figure imgf000021_0002
20 21 22 23
Figure imgf000021_0003
24 25 26
[0050] wherein • represents a bonding site to the formula [27]: [0051]
Figure imgf000021_0004
97 and [0052]
A* represents a bonding site to X2, and more preferably refers to a ring of the formula [21]: [0053]
Figure imgf000022_0001
21 * [0054]
The group may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the following Substituent Group bl. [0055]
The "fϊve-membered aromatic heterocyclic group fused with a 5- to 14-membered non-aromatic ring group (wherein the non-aromatic ring group may have a crosslinked structure or a spiro ring system)" is not particularly limited insofar as it is a five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group fused with a 5- to 14-membered non-aromatic ring group which contains two or more nitrogen atoms (wherein non-aromatic ring group may have a crosslinked structure or a spiro ring system). The group is preferably any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [28] to [39]: [0056]
Figure imgf000022_0002
[0057] wherein • and A* are as defined above and the partial structure: [0058] [0059] represents a single bond or a double bond, more preferably a ring selected from the group consisting of:
[0060]
Figure imgf000023_0001
34 35 36 37
[0061] wherein •, A* and the partial structure: [0062]
[0063] are as defined above, and particularly preferably a ring selected from the group consisting of the formula [28-1]: [0064]
Figure imgf000023_0002
[0065] wherein •, A* and the partial structure: [0066]
[0067] are as defined above. The group may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the following Substituent Group bl. The phrase "may have a crosslinked structure or a spiro ring system" refers to the fact that two carbon atoms on the non-aromatic ring group together may form a crosslinked structure, or the fact that a carbon atom on the non-aromatic ring group may form a spiro ring system. [0068] The "Substituent Group bl " refers to a group consisting of a Cl -6 alkyl group
(wherein the alkyl group may be substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms), a C2-6 alkenyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C6-14 aryl group, a C6-14 aryl-Cl-6 alkyl group, a Cl -6 alkoxy group, a C2-6 alkenyloxy group, a C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group, a C2-6 alkanoyl group, a C4-9 cycloalkylcarbonyl group, a C7-15 aroyl group, a C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group, a C2-6 alkenylsulfonyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group, a C6-14 arylsulfonyl group, a C 1-6 alkylthio group, a C2-6 alkenylthio group, a C3-8 cycloalkylthio group, an aminosulfonyl group (wherein the aminosulfonyl group may have 1 to 2 C 1-6 alkyl groups, C2-6 alkenyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group, C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group or C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 C 1-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), a cyano group, a formyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, an oxo group, a 1-pyrrolidinyl group, a 1-piperidinyl group, a 1-homopiperidinyl group, an indolin-1-yl group, a 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinolin-l-yl group and a 4-morpholinyl group. Preferable among these is a substituent selected from the group consisting of a C 1-6 alkyl group (wherein the alkyl group may be substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms), a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C6-14 aryl group, a C6-14 aryl-Cl-6 alkyl group, a C 1-6 alkoxy group, a C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group, a C2-6 alkanoyl group, a C7-15 aroyl group, a C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group, a C6-14 arylsulfonyl group, a cyano group, a formyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group and an oxo group. Particularly preferable are a C 1-6 alkyl group (wherein the alkyl group may be substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms), a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C6-14 aryl group, a C6-14 aryl-Cl-6 alkyl group, a Cl-6 alkoxy group, a C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group and a halogen atom. [0069]
Ring B represents, for example, a monocyclic or fused cyclic aromatic ring group selected from the group consisting of the formulas [2] to [19]: [0070]
Figure imgf000025_0001
[0071] and is preferably a phenyl group, a pyridyl group, an oxazolyl group, an imidazolyl group, a thiazolyl group, a dihydrobenzofuranyl group or a thienyl group, and particularly preferably a phenyl group or a pyridyl group. Ring B may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the following Substituent Group cl. [0072]
The "Substituent Group cl" refers to a group consisting of i) an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group, C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group or C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 C 1-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), ii) a cyano group, iii) a halogen atom, iv) a hydroxyl group and v) v)-i) a C 1-6 alkyl group, v)-ii) a C2-6 alkenyl group, v)-iii) a C2-6 alkynyl group, v)-iv) a Cl -6 alkoxy group, v)-v) a C 1-6 alkylthio group, v)-vi) a C 1-6 alkylaminocarbonyl group, v)-vii) a Cl -6 alkylsulfonyl group, v)-viii) a Cl- 6 alkylaminosulfonyl group, v)-ix) a C2-6 alkanoyl group, v)-x) a phenyl group, v)-xi) a pyridyl group, v)-xii) a pyridazinyl group, v)-xiii) a pyrimidinyl group, v)-xiv) a 1-pyrrolidinyl group, v)-xv) a 1-piperidinyl group, v)-xvi) a 1 -homopiperidinyl group and v)-xvii) a 4-morpholinyl group, each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of a C 1-6 alkyl group and a halogen atom. Preferable among these is a substituent selected from the group consisting of i) an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group, C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group or C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 C 1-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), ii) a cyano group, iii) a halogen atom, iv) a hydroxyl group and v) v)-i) a Cl -6 alkyl group, v)-ii) a C 1-6 alkoxy group, v)-iii) a C 1-6 alkylthio group and v)-iv) a phenyl group, each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of a Cl -6 alkyl group and a halogen atom. Particularly preferable is a substituent selected from the group consisting of i) a halogen atom and ii) ii)-i) a Cl -6 alkyl group and Ii)-Il) a C 1-6 alkoxy group, each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of a Cl -6 alkyl group and a halogen atom.
[0073]
The "C 1-6 alkyl group" refers to an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
Preferable examples of the group include linear or branched alkyl groups such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, an isobutyl group, a tertiary butyl group, an n-pentyl group, an isopentyl group, a neopentyl group, an n-hexyl group, a 1-methylpropyl group, an 1,2-dimethylpropyl group, a 1-ethylpropyl group, a l-methyl-2- ethylpropyl group, a l-ethyl-2-methylpropyl group, a 1,1,2-trimethylpropyl group, a 1- methylbutyl group, a 2-methylbutyl group, a 1,1-dimethylbutyl group, a 2,2-dimethylbutyl group, a 2-ethylbutyl group, a 1 ,3-dimethylbutyl group, a 2-methylpentyl group and a 3- methylpentyl group.
[0074]
The "halogen atom" refers to a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom or the like and is preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom. [0075]
The "C 1-6 alkylene group" refers to an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Preferable examples of the group include linear or branched alkyl groups such as a methylene group, an ethylene group, a methylmethylene group, a propylene group, a methylethylene group, an ethylmethylene group, a dimethylmethylene group, a butylene group, a methylpropylene group, an ethylethylene group, a dimethylethylene group, a propylmethylene group, a pentylene group and a hexylene group. Among these, a methylene group, an ethylene group, a methylmethylene group, a propylene group, a methylethylene group, an ethylmethylene group and a dimethylmethylene group are preferable, for example.
[0076] The "C3-8 cycloalkyl group" refers to a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms. Preferable examples of the group include a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group and a cycloheptyl group.
[0077]
The "C2-6 alkanoyl group" refers to an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is substituted with a carbonyl group. Preferable examples of the group include an acetyl group, a propionyl group and a butyryl group.
[0078]
The "C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group" refers to an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by a sulfonyl group. Preferable examples of the group include a methanesulfonyl group and an ethanesulfonyl group.
[0079]
The "C2-6 alkenyl group" refers to an alkenyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
Preferable examples of the group include linear or branched alkenyl groups such as a vinyl group, an allyl group, a 1-propenyl group, an isopropenyl group, a 1-buten-l-yl group, a 1-buten-
2-yl group, a l-buten-3-yl group, a 2-buten-l-yl group and a 2-buten-2-yl group.
[0080]
The "C 1-6 alkoxy group" refers to an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in which a hydrogen atom is replaced by an oxygen atom. Preferable examples of the group include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, an n-propoxy group, an isopropoxy group, an n- butoxy group, an isobutoxy group, a sec-butoxy group, a tertiary butoxy group, an n-pentoxy group, an isopentoxy group, a sec-pentoxy group, a tertiary pentoxy group, an n-hexoxy group, an isohexoxy group, a 1,2-dimethylpropoxy group, a 2-ethylpropoxy group, a l-methyl-2- ethylpropoxy group, a l-ethyl-2-methylpropoxy group, a 1,1,2-trimethylpropoxy group, a 1,1,2- trimethylpropoxy group, a 1,1-dimethylbutoxy group, a 2,2-dimethylbutoxy group, a 2- ethylbutoxy group, a 1,3-dimethylbutoxy group, a 2-methylpentoxy group and a 3- methylpentoxy group.
[0081]
The "C2-6 alkenyloxy group" refers to an alkenyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by an oxygen atom. Preferable examples of the group include linear or branched alkenyloxy groups such as a vinyloxy group, an allyloxy group, a 1-propenyloxy group, an isopropenyloxy group, a 1-buten-l-yloxy group, a l-buten-2-yloxy group, a l-buten-3-yloxy group, a 2-buten-l-yloxy group and a 2-buten-2-yloxy group.
[0082] The "C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group" refers to a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by an oxygen atom. Preferable examples of the group include a cyclopropoxy group, a cyclobutoxy group, a cyclopentoxy group, a cyclohexoxy group and a cycloheptyloxy group.
[0083] The "C6-14 aryl group" refers to an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms. Preferable examples of the group include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthryl group and a phenanthryl group.
[0084]
The "C6-14 aryl-Cl-6 alkyl group" refers to an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by the aforementioned "C6-14 aryl group". Preferable examples of the group include a benzyl group, a phenethyl group, a phenylpropyl group, a naphthylmethyl group, a naphthylethyl group and a naphthylpropyl group. [0085] The "C4-9 cycloalkylcarbonyl group" refers to a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms substituted with a carbonyl group. Preferable examples of the group include a cyclopropylcarbonyl group, a cyclobutylcarbonyl group, a cyclopentylcarbonyl group, a cyclohexylcarbonyl group and a cycloheptylcarbonyl group. [0086] The "C7-15 aroyl group" refers to the aforementioned "C6-14 aryl group" substituted with a carbonyl group. Preferable examples of the group include a benzoyl group, a naphthylcarbonyl group and an anthrylcarbonyl group.
[0087]
The "C2-6 alkenylsulfonyl group" refers to an alkenyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by a sulfonyl group. Preferable examples of the group include linear or branched alkenylsulfonyl groups such as a vinylsulfonyl group, an allylsulfonyl group, a 1-propenylsulfonyl group, an isopropenylsulfonyl group, a 1-buten-l- ylsulfonyl group, a l-buten-2-ylsulfonyl group, a l-buten-3-ylsulfonyl group, a 2-buten-l- ylsulfonyl group and a 2-buten-2-ylsulfonyl group. [0088]
The "C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group" refers to a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by a sulfonyl group. Preferable examples of the group include a cyclopropylsulfonyl group, a cyclobutylsulfonyl group, a cyclopentylsulfonyl group, a cyclohexylsulfonyl group and a cycloheptylsulfonyl group. [0089]
The "C6-14 arylsulfonyl group" refers to an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by a sulfonyl group. Preferable examples of the group include a phenylsulfonyl group, a naphthylsulfonyl group and an anthrylsulfonyl group. [0090]
The "C 1-6 alkylthio group" refers to an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by a sulfur atom. Preferable examples of the group include a methylthio group, an ethylthio group, an n-propylthio group, an isopropylthio group, an n-butylthio group, an isobutylthio group, a tert-butylthio group, an n-pentylthio group, an isopentylthio group, a neopentylthio group, an n-hexylthio group and a 1-methylpropylthio group.
[0091]
The "C2-6 alkenylthio group" refers to an alkenylthio group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms. Preferable examples of the group include linear or branched alkenylthio groups such as a vinylthio group, an allylthio group, a 1-propenylthio group, an isopropenylthio group, a 1- buten-1-ylthio group, a l-buten-2-ylthio group, a l-buten-3-ylthio group, a 2-buten-l-ylthio group and a 2-buten-2-ylthio group. [0092] The "C3-8 cycloalkylthio group" refers to a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by a sulfur atom. Preferable examples of the group include a cyclopropylthio group, a cyclobutylthio group, a cyclopentylthio group, a cyclohexylthio group and a cycloheptylthio group. [0093] Examples of the "aminosulfonyl group which may have 1 to 2 C 1-6 alkyl groups,
C2-6 alkenyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups" include an aminosulfonyl group as well as a methylaminosulfonyl group, an ethylaminosulfonyl group, a dimethylaminosulfonyl group, a diethylaminosulfonyl group, a vinylaminosulfonyl group, an allylaminosulfonyl group, a cyclopropylaminosulfonyl group, a cyclobutylaminosulfonyl group and a cyclohexylaminosulfonyl group. [0094]
Examples of the "amino group which may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group, C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group or C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 Cl -6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups" include an amino group as well as an acetylamino group, an propionylamino group, a methanesulfonylamino group, an ethanesulfonylamino group, a pentanesulfonylamino group, a methylamino group, a dimethylamino group, an ethylamino group, a diethylamino group, a cyclopropylamino group, a cyclobutylamino group and a cyclohexylamino group. [0095]
The "C 1-6 alkylaminocarbonyl group" refers to an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by an aminocarbonyl group. Preferable examples of the group include a methylaminocarbonyl group, an ethylaminocarbonyl group, a propylaminocarbonyl group, a butylaminocarbonyl group and a hexylaminocarbonyl group. [0096]
The "Cl -6 alkylaminosulfonyl group" refers to an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by an aminosulfonyl group. Preferable examples of the group include a methylaminosulfonyl group, an ethylaminosulfonyl group, a propylaminosulfonyl group, a butylaminosulfonyl group and a hexylaminosulfonyl group. [0097] In the present invention, the "pharmacologically acceptable salt" is not particularly limited insofar as it is a pharmacologically acceptable salt formed with the compound of the general formula (I) which is a therapeutic agent for a disease caused by Aβ. Preferable specific examples of the salt include hydrohalides (such as hydrofluorides, hydrochlorides, hydrobromides and hydroiodides), inorganic acid salts (such as sulfates, nitrates, perchlorates, phosphates, carbonates and bicarbonates), organic carboxylates (such as acetates, oxalates, maleates, tartrates, fumarates and citrates), organic sulfonates (such as methanesulfonates, trifiuoromethanesulfonates, ethanesulfonates, benzenesulfonates, toluenesulfonates and camphorsulfonates), amino acid salts (such as aspartates and glutamates), quaternary amine salts, alkali metal salts (such as sodium salts and potassium salts) and alkali earth metal salts (such as magnesium salts and calcium salts). [0098]
Next, the compound of the formula (I) according to the present invention will be described.
In the compound of the formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof, Ring A is preferably a five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group selected from the group consisting of the formulas [20] to [26]: [0099]
Figure imgf000030_0001
20 21 22 23
Figure imgf000030_0002
24 25 26
[0100] wherein • represents a bonding site to the formula [27]: [0101]
Figure imgf000031_0001
[0102]
A« represents a bonding site to X2, or any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [28] to [39]: [0103]
Figure imgf000031_0002
[0104] wherein • and A» are as defined above and the partial structure:
[0105]
[0106] represents a single bond or a double bond, each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from Substituent Group bl . Ring A is more preferably any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [21], [28], [29], [31], [32] and [34] to [37]: [0107]
Figure imgf000032_0001
34 35 36 37
[0108] wherein •, A* and the partial structure:
[0109]
[0110] are as defined above. Ring A is particularly preferably any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [21], [28-1], [29-1], [31-1], [32-1] and [34-1] to [37-1]:
[0111]
Figure imgf000032_0002
[0112] wherein •, A* and the partial structure: [0113]
[0114] are as defined above. Ring A is most preferably a ring of the formula [28- 1 ] : [0115]
r X J^L N >^ Λ
28-1
[0116] wherein •, A» and the partial structure:
[0117]
[0118] are as defined above. [0119]
In the compound of the formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof, Ring B is preferably a phenyl group, a pyridyl group, an oxazolyl group, an imidazolyl group, a thiazolyl group, a dihydrobenzofuranyl group or a thienyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group. [0120]
In the compound of the formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof, Xi is preferably i) a single bond or ii) -CRs=CR4-. [0121]
In the compound of the formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof, X2 is preferably i) a single bond or ii) a C 1-6 alkylene group, and X2 is more preferably a single bond. [0122] In the compound of the formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof, preferably, Ri is a Cl -6 alkyl group or a halogen atom and m is 1 to 2. [0123]
In the compound of the formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof, preferably, R2 is a C 1-6 alkoxy group and n is 1. [0124] hi the compound of the formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof, preferably, R3 and R4 are the same or different and are each (1) a hydrogen atom or (2) a halogen atom. More preferably, R3 and R4 are both hydrogen atoms. [0125]
In the compound of the formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof, the substituent for Ring A is preferably a substituent selected from the group consisting of a C 1-6 alkyl group (wherein the alkyl group may be substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms), a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C6-14 aryl group, a C6-14 aryl-Cl-6 alkyl group, a Cl -6 alkoxy group, a C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group, a C2-6 alkanoyl group, a C7-15 aroyl group, a C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group, a C6-14 arylsulfonyl group, a cyano group, a formyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group and an oxo group. [0126] In the compound of the formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof, the substituent for Ring B is preferably a substituent selected from the group consisting of i) an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group, C 1-6 alkylsulfonyl group or C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 C 1-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), ii) a cyano group, iii) a halogen atom, iv) a hydroxyl group and v) v)-i) a Cl- 6 alkyl group, v)-ii) a Cl -6 alkoxy group, v)-iii) a C 1-6 alkylthio group and v)-iv) a phenyl group, each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of a C 1-6 alkyl group and a halogen atom. [0127]
At least one compound selected from the group consisting of the following formulas [A-I] to [A-7]:
[0128]
Figure imgf000035_0001
or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof is particularly suitable, for example, and is useful as a therapeutic agent for a disease caused by amyloid-β such as Alzheimer's disease, senile dementia, Down's syndrome or amyloidosis. [0129]
Methods for preparing the compound of the general formula (I) according to the present invention will be described below.
The compound represented by the general formula [I]: [0130]
Figure imgf000036_0001
[0131] wherein R1, R2, Xi, X2, m, n, Ring A and Ring B are as defined above, is synthesized according to a method such as the following General Preparation Method 1 and General Preparation Method 2, for example. It is obvious that, in order to prepare the compound of the present invention conveniently, the method comprises a protection reaction step and a deprotection reaction step appropriately, using a protecting group known to a person skilled in the art which is suitably selected for each step (see T. Greene et al., "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis", John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1981). It is obvious that, in order to prepare the compound of the present invention conveniently, the method comprises substituent conversion, substituent introduction and the like suitable for each step and known to a person skilled in the art. It is also obvious that, in order to prepare the compound of the present invention conveniently, all isomers and isomer mixtures such as geometric isomers which can be generated from the structure of the compound, optical isomers based on asymmetric carbon, stereoisomers, and tautomers can be prepared as a single compound by a technique known to a person skilled in the art which is suitable for each step such as fractional crystallization or column chromatography. [0132] General Preparation Method 1
Typically used General Preparation Method 1 for the compound of the general formula [I] according to the present invention will be described below. [0133]
Figure imgf000037_0001
[0134]
In the formula, Ri, R2, X1, X2, m, n, Ring A and Ring B are as defined above; XA represents a halogen atom such as a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom or a sulfonate group such as a methanesulfonate group, a p-toluenesulfonate group or a trifluoromethanesulfonate group; and XB represents a trialkylstannyl group, a boronic acid group, a boronate group such as a pinacol boronate group, alkylboronalkenyl group, a C2-6 alkenyl group or a C2-6 alkynyl group. [0135] The above General Preparation Method 1 is a method for preparing the compound of the general formula [I] by subjecting to coupling reaction in Step 1-1 a compound of the general formula (a-1) and a compound of the general formula (b-2) or a method for preparing the compound of the general formula [I] by subjecting to coupling reaction in Step 1-1 a compound of the general formula (a-2) and a compound of the general formula (b-1) in which the substituents XA and XB are replaced by each other.
The coupling reaction in Step 1-1 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. Preferable examples of the method include Mizoroki-Heck reaction (see R.F. Heck, "Org. Reactions.", 1982, vol. 27, p. 345, for example), Suzuki-Miyaura reaction (see A. Suzuki, "Chem. Rev.", 1995, vol. 95, p. 2457, for example), Sonogashira reaction (see K. Sonogashira, "Comprehensive Organic Synthesis", 1991, vol. 3, p. 521, for example) and Stille coupling reaction (see J.K. Stille, "Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl.", 1986, vol. 25, p. 508, for example). [0136] In Mizoroki-Heck reaction, a halogen compound or trifluoromethanesulfonate group compound of the general formula (a-1) is preferably coupled with 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (b-2) (wherein XB is preferably a C2-6 alkenyl group) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1) in the presence of 0.01 to 0.2 equivalent of a transition metal catalyst with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1), for example. This reaction is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent from the viewpoint of handleability and stirring efficiency. The solvent used varies according to the starting material and the transition metal catalyst used, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent. Preferable examples of the solvent include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, 1,2- dimethoxyethane, benzene, toluene, xylene, l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N,N- dimethylformamide. The reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the coupling reaction, and is preferably room temperature to 1500C. This reaction is performed preferably in an inert gas atmosphere, and more preferably in a nitrogen or argon atmosphere. The transition metal catalyst is preferably a palladium complex, for example, and more preferably a known palladium complex such as palladium (II) acetate, dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0). It is also preferable to appropriately add a phosphine ligand (preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine, tri-tert-butylphosphine or 2-(di-tert-butylphosphino)biphenyl, for example) in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed. A preferable result may be achieved in the presence of a base. The base used is not particularly limited insofar as it is used in a coupling reaction similar to this reaction. Preferable examples of the base include triethylamine, N,N-diisopropylethylamine, N5N- dicyclohexylmethylamine and tetrabutylammonium chloride. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. [0137]
In Suzuki-Miyaura reaction, a halogen compound or trifluoromethanesulfonate compound of the general formula (a-1) is preferably coupled with 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (b-2) (wherein XB is preferably a boronic acid group, a boronate group such as a pinacol boronate group, an alkylboronalkenyl group or the like) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1) in the presence of 0.01 to 0.5 equivalent of a transition metal catalyst with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1), for example. This reaction is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent from the viewpoint of handleability and stirring efficiency. The solvent used varies according to the starting material and the transition metal catalyst used, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent. Preferable examples of the solvent include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, 1,2- dimethoxyethane, benzene, toluene, xylene, l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N,N-dimethylformamide, water and a mixed solvent thereof. The reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the coupling reaction, and is preferably room temperature to 2000C. This reaction is performed preferably in an inert gas atmosphere, and more preferably in a nitrogen or argon atmosphere. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. The transition metal catalyst is preferably a known palladium complex, and more preferably a known palladium complex such as palladium (II) acetate, dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0). A phosphorus ligand (preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine, tricyclohexylphosphine or tri-tert-butylphosphine, for example) may be appropriately added in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed. A quaternary ammonium salt, preferably tetrabutylammonium chloride or tetrabutylammonium bromide, for example, may also be appropriately added in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed. In this reaction, a preferable result may be achieved in the presence of a base. The base used at this time varies according to the starting material, the solvent used and the like, and is not particularly limited. Preferable examples of the base include sodium hydroxide, barium hydroxide, potassium fluoride, cesium fluoride, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, cesium carbonate and potassium phosphate. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. [0138] The Sonogashira reaction vary according to the starting material, the solvent and the transition metal catalyst, and are not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. Preferably, a compound of the general formula (a-1) is coupled with 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (b-2) (wherein XB is preferably a C2-6 alkynyl group) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1) in the presence of 0.01 to 0.2 equivalent of a transition metal catalyst with respect to the compound of the general formula (a- 1), for example. Preferable examples of the solvent used include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, benzene, toluene, xylene, l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N,N- dimethylformamide and dimethyl sulfoxide. More preferable examples of the solvent include tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N,N-dimethylformamide. The reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the coupling reaction, and is preferably room temperature to 1500C. This reaction is performed preferably in an inert gas atmosphere, and more preferably in a nitrogen or argon atmosphere. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. The transition metal catalyst is, for example, a known palladium complex, and more preferably a known palladium complex such as palladium (II) acetate, dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0). A phosphorus ligand (preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine or tri-tert- butylphosphine, for example) may be appropriately added, for example, in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed. In the reaction, it is possible to add a metal halide or a quaternary ammonium salt, preferably copper (I) iodide, lithium chloride, tetrabutylammonium fluoride or silver (I) oxide, for example. A preferable result may be achieved in the presence of a base. The base used here is not particularly limited insofar as it is used in a coupling reaction similar to this reaction. Preferable examples of the base include basic solvents such as diethylamine, triethylamine, N,N-diisopropylethylamine, piperidine and pyridine. [0139]
In Stille coupling reaction, a halogen compound or trifluoromethanesulfonate group compound of the general formula (a-1) is preferably coupled with 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (b-2) (wherein XB is preferably a trialkylstannyl group) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1) in the presence of 0.01 to 0.2 equivalent of a transition metal catalyst with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1), for example. It is preferable to appropriately use in this reaction 0.1 to 5.0 equivalents of copper (I) halide or/and lithium chloride in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed. Preferable examples of the solvent used in this reaction include toluene, xylene, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and dimethyl sulfoxide. The reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the coupling reaction, and is preferably room temperature to 1500C. The preferable transition metal catalyst is a palladium complex, preferably a known palladium complex such as palladium (II) acetate, dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0), for example, and more preferably palladium (II) acetate, tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0), for example. A phosphorus ligand (preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine, 1 ,3- bis(diphenylphosphino)propane or tri-tert-butylphosphine, for example) may be appropriately added, for example, in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed. This reaction is performed preferably in an inert gas atmosphere, and more preferably in a nitrogen or argon atmosphere. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. [0140]
Step 1-2 is an example of a method for preparing a compound of the general formula (a-2) and a compound of the general formula (b-2) in which the substituents XA and XB are replaced by each other. This step varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. The same method as in Step 1-1 may be preferably used such as Mizoroki-Heck reaction (see R.F. Heck, "Org. Reactions.", 1982, vol. 27, p. 345, for example), Suzuki-Miyaura reaction (see A. Suzuki, "Chem. Rev.", 1995, vol. 95, p. 2457, for example), Sonogashira reaction (see K. Sonogashira, "Comprehensive Organic Synthesis", 1991, vol. 3, p. 521, for example) or Stille coupling reaction (see J.K. Stille, "Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl.", 1986, vol. 25, p. 508, for example).
The compound of the formula (a-1), the compound of the formula (a-2), the compound of the formula (b-1) and the compound of the formula (b-2) are known or commercially available compounds or are compounds that can be prepared from these compounds by a conventional method. [0141]
Preparation of compound of general formula (a-1) [0142]
Figure imgf000041_0001
[0143]
In the formula, Ri, R2, m, n and XA are as defined above; RA and RB are as defined for Ri above; Li represents a halogen atom such as a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom or a sulfonate group such as a methanesulfonate group, a p-toluenesulfonate group or a trifluoromethanesulfonate group; and L2 represents a halogen atom such as a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom, a sulfonate group such as a methanesulfonate group, a p-toluenesulfonate group or a trifluoromethanesulfonate group or a boronic acid group. [0144]
The compound of the general formula (a-1) can be prepared from an amine compound (a-3) as a starting material through formylation in Step 2-1, coupling reaction in Step 2-2 and formation of an imidazole ring in Step 2-3, or can be prepared from a compound of the general formula (a-4) as a starting material by coupling reaction in Step 2-4. [0145]
Step 2-1 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. A method reported in many documents or the like (T. Greene et al., "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis", John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1981, for example) may be used. [0146] Step 2-2 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. Preferable examples of the method include a method of stirring a compound of the general formula (a-5) and 1.0 to 10.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (c-1) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a- 5) in a solvent in the presence of 1.0 to 10.0 equivalents of a base with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-5). The base used varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited. Preferable examples of the base include alkali metal hydrides (such as sodium hydride and lithium hydride), alkali metal salts (such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate and cesium carbonate) and metal alkoxides (such as sodium methoxide and potassium tert-butoxide). The solvent used varies according to the starting material, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent. Preferable examples of the solvent include ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, 1 ,4-dioxane and diethyl ether; halogenated solvents such as methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and chloroform; polar solvents such as N,N-dirnethylformamide and N- methylpyrrolidone; non-polar solvents such as toluene and benzene; and mixtures thereof. The reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably 00C to 2000C, for example. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique, extraction or/and crystallization. [0147]
Step 2-3 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. A method reported in many documents or the like (such as described in The Chemistry of Heterocyclic Compounds. Imidazole and Derivatives, Part I, p. 33, Inters. Publish. 1953) may be used. Preferable examples of the method include a method for preparing the compound of the general formula (a-1) by forming an imidazole ring from a compound of the general formula (a-6) and ammonia, ammonium salt, formamide or the like as a nitrogen source. The solvent used is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent. Preferable examples of the solvent include non-polar solvents such as toluene and benzene; alcohol solvents such as methanol and ethanol; organic acids such as acetic acid or trifluoroacetic acid, sulfonic acids such as p-toluenesulfonic acid and trifluoromethanesulfonic acid; water; and mixtures thereof. Formamide may optionally be used as a nitrogen atom source and as a solvent. The reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably room temperature to 2500C, for example. The yield may be improved when the reaction is performed using a tight container. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique, extraction or/and crystallization. [0148]
The coupling reaction in Step 2-4 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. A method reported in many documents or the like (such as described in D.D. Davey et al., "J. Med. Chem.", 1991, vol. 34, p. 2671 -2677) may be used. Examples of the method include a method of stirring a compound of the general formula (a-4) and 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of an imidazole compound (c-2) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-4) in a solvent in the presence or absence of 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a base with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-4). Preferable examples of the base used include sodium hydride, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, barium carbonate, pyridine, lutidine and triethylamine. The solvent used varies according to the starting material, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent. Preferable examples of the solvent include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethyl sulfoxide, N,N-dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidine. The base may optionally be used as a solvent. The reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably room temperature to 1500C, for example. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique or/and crystallization.
Examples of the coupling reaction in Step 2-4 include a method of stirring a compound of the general formula (a-4) (wherein L2 is preferably a boronic acid group or the like) in a solvent in the presence of a copper catalyst (such as described in J.P. Collman et al., "Org. Letters.", 2000, vol. 2, p. 1233-1236). Preferable examples of the method include a method of stirring a compound of the general formula (a-4) and 0.1 to 10.0 equivalents of an imidazole compound (c-2) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-4) in a solvent in the presence of 0.01 to 1.0 equivalent of a copper reagent such as copper, copper bromide or copper iodide with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-4). The copper reagent used varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited. Preferable examples of the copper reagent include copper (I) halide, copper (II) acetate, copper (II) nitrate and di-μ-hydroxo-bis[(N,N,N',N'-tetramethylethylenediamine)copper (II)] chloride. The solvent used varies according to the starting material, the reagent and the like, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent. Preferable examples of the solvent include ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane and diethyl ether; halogenated solvents such as methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and chloroform; polar solvents such as ethyl acetate, N,N-dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidone; non-polar solvents such as toluene, benzene and dichlorobenzene; and mixtures thereof. A base may be used depending on the starting material, the reagent and the like. Preferable examples of the base include organic bases such as triethylamine, pyridine and tetramethylethylenediamine; alkali metal salts such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, potassium acetate, sodium acetate and cesium carbonate; and metal alkoxides such as sodium methoxide and potassium tert-butoxide. The reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably room temperature to 2000C, for example. Good results such as reduction in the reaction time and improvement of the yield can be achieved when the reaction is performed in an oxygen atmosphere or air stream. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique, extraction or/and crystallization.
The compound of the formula (a-3), the compound of the formula (a-4), the compound of the formula (c-1) and the compound of the formula (c-2) are known or commercially available compounds or are compounds that can be prepared from these compounds by a conventional method. [0149] Preparation of compound of general formula (b-1) [0150]
Figure imgf000045_0001
(d-1) (e-1) (d-2) (f-1) (d-3) ii) Deprotection reaction [Step 3 - 3 ]
Figure imgf000045_0002
(b-1) (b-3)
[0151]
In the formula, X2, XA, Ring A and Ring B are as defined above; L3 and L4 are as defined for L1 above; Xc represents a C2-4 alkylene group, or a C2-3 alkylene group in which one methylene group is replaced by an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom (wherein the nitrogen atom may have a substituent such as a C 1-6 alkyl group or a benzyl group); Pi represents a carboxyl-protecting group such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a benzyl group, an allyl group, a triphenylmethyl group, a tert-butyl group or a tert-butyldimethylsilyl group, or a hydrogen atom; and P2 represents a nitrogen-protecting group such as a tert-butoxycarbonyl group or a benzyloxycarbonyl group. [0152]
The compound of the general formula (b-1) can be prepared from a compound of the general formula (d-1) as a starting material through alkylation in Step 3-1, hydrazidation and deprotection reaction in Step 3-2, formation of Ring A in Step 3-3 and Sandmeyer reaction in Step 3-4. [0153] Step 3-1 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. Preferable examples of the method include a method of stirring a compound of the general formula (d-1) and 1.0 to 10.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (e-1) with respect to the compound of the general formula (d- 1) in a solvent in the presence of 1.0 to 10.0 equivalents of a base with respect to the compound of the general formula (d-1). The base used varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited. Preferable examples of the base include alkali metal hydrides (such as sodium hydride and lithium hydride), alkali metal salts (such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate and cesium carbonate), metal alkoxides (such as sodium methoxide and potassium tert-butoxide) and organometallic bases (such as butyllithium, lithium diisopropylamide and lithium bistrimethylsilylamide). The solvent used varies according to the starting material, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent. Preferable examples of the solvent include ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane and diethyl ether; halogenated solvents such as methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and chloroform; polar solvents such as N,N- dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidone; non-polar solvents such as toluene and benzene; and mixtures thereof. The reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably -1000C to 1000C, for example. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique, extraction or/and crystallization. [0154]
The hydrazidation reaction as the first stage of Step 3-2 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. An amidation reaction known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. A method reported in many documents or the like (such as described in The Chemical Society of Japan (ed.), Jikken Kagaku Koza (Courses in Experimental Chemistry), 4th edition (vol. 22) Yuki Gosei (Organic Synthesis) [IV], Maruzen Co., Ltd., November 1992, p. 137-144) may be used. The deprotection reaction as the second stage varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A deprotection reaction known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. A method reported in many documents or the like (see T. Greene et al., "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis", John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1981, for example) may be used. [0155]
The Ring A formation reaction in Step 3-3 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. Preferable examples of the method include a method of heating a compound of the general formula (d-3) and 1.0 to 10.0 equivalents of aminoguanidine, isothiourea, cyanamide or the like with respect to the compound of the general formula (d-3) in a solvent under basic or acidic conditions. The base or acid used varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited. Examples of the base or acid include bases such as alkali metal hydrides (such as sodium hydride and lithium hydride), alkali metal salts (such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate and cesium carbonate), metal alkoxides (such as sodium methoxide and potassium tert-butoxide) and organic bases (such as triethylamine, pyridine and 1,8- diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene); and acids such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, p- toluenesulfonic acid and camphorsulfonic acid. The solvent used varies according to the starting material, and is not particularly limited insofar as the solvent does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent. Preferable examples of the solvent include alcohol solvents such as methanol, ethanol and tert-butanol; ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane and diethyl ether; halogenated solvents such as methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and chloroform; polar solvents such as acetonitrile, N,N-dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidone; non-polar solvents such as xylene, toluene and benzene; and mixtures thereof. The reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably -1000C to 1000C, for example. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 48 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique, extraction or/and crystallization. [0156] The Sandmeyer reaction in Step 3-4 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. A method reported in many documents or the like (such as described in The Chemical Society of Japan (ed.), Jikken Kagaku Koza (Courses in Experimental Chemistry), 4th edition (vol. 19) Yuki Gosei (Organic Synthesis) [I], Maruzen Co., Ltd., November 1992, p. 450-453) may be used. [0157] Preparation of compound of general formula (b-2)
The following formula shows an example of preparation of the compound of the general formula (b-2). [0158]
Figure imgf000048_0001
XA-TAJ-X2-TBJ — - XB-TAVX2-TBJ —
Figure imgf000048_0002
(b-1) (b-2) (b-4)
[0159]
In the formula, X2, XA, XC5 PI, L3, Ring A and Ring B are as defined above, wherein XB represents a C2-6 alkenyl group and L5 represents a leaving group such as a phenylthio group or a p-tolylsulfanyl group.
[0160]
The compound of the general formula (b-2) can be prepared from a compound of the general formula (b-1) as a starting material in Step 1-2 as described above. Alternatively, the compound can be prepared from a compound of the general formula (d-2) as a starting material through hydrazidation in Step 4- 1 , acy lation in Step 4-2, formation of Ring A in Step 4-
3 and thermal decomposition reaction in Step 4-4.
[0161]
Step 4-1 may employ the same amidation reaction as in the aforementioned Step
3-2. Preferable examples of the method include a method of stirring a compound of the general formula (d-2) and 1.0 to 10.0 equivalents of hydrazine with respect to the compound of the general formula (d-1) in a solvent. Neutral reaction conditions are preferred in order to make the reaction conveniently proceed. The solvent used varies according to the starting material, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent. Preferable examples of the solvent include ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane and diethyl ether; halogenated solvents such as methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and chloroform; polar solvents such as N5N- dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidone; non-polar solvents such as toluene and benzene; and mixtures thereof. The reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably room temperature to 1000C, for example. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique, extraction or/and crystallization. [0162] Step 4-2 may employ the same amidation reaction as in the aforementioned Step
3-2. A method reported in many documents or the like (such as described in The Chemical Society of Japan (ed.), Jikken Kagaku Koza (Courses in Experimental Chemistry), 4th edition (vol. 22) Yuki Gosei (Organic Synthesis) [IV], Maruzen Co., Ltd., November 1992, p. 137-144) may be used. [0163]
Step 4-3 may employ the same cyclization conditions as in the aforementioned Step 2-3. More preferably, a compound of the general formula (b-4) can be conveniently prepared by heating with stirring a compound of the general formula (d-5) and 1.0 to 10 equivalents of phosphorus oxychloride with respect to the compound of the general formula (d- 5) and then heating the resulting compound and 1.0 to 10 equivalents of ammonium acetate with respect to the compound of the general formula (d-5) in an acetic acid solvent, for example. [0164]
The thermal decomposition reaction in Step 4-4 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. A method reported in many documents or the like (such as described in W. Carrutthers, "Some modern methods of organic synthesis, Third Edition" (Cambridge University Press, 1986, p. 120- 121)) may be used. More preferably, the compound of the general formula (b-2) can be conveniently prepared by subjecting the compound of the general formula (b-4) to an oxidation reaction known to a person skilled in the art and heating the compound, for example.
The compound of the formula (d-1), the compound of the formula (e-1), the compound of the formula (e-2) and the compound of the formula (f-1) are known or commercially available compounds or are compounds that can be prepared from these compounds by a conventional method. [0165] General Preparation Method 2
Typically used General Preparation Method 2 for the compound of the general formula [I] according to the present invention will be described below. [0166]
Figure imgf000050_0001
[0167]
In the formula, Ri, R2, X1, X2, Xc, Pi, L3, m, n, Ring A and Ring B are as defined above.
The above General Preparation Method 2 shows an example describing preparation of the compound of the general formula [I] by subjecting a compound of the general formula (a-7) and a compound of the general formula (d-6) to cyclization reaction in Step 5-1. [0168]
The Ring A formation reaction in Step 5-1 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. Preferable examples of the method include a method of stirring a compound of the general formula (a-7) and 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (d-6) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-7) in a solvent in the presence of 1.0 to 10.0 equivalents of a base with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-7). This reaction is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent from the viewpoint of handleability and stirring efficiency. The solvent used varies according to the starting material, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent. Preferable examples of the solvent include alcohol solvents such as methanol, ethanol and tert-butanol; ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, 1,4- dioxane and diethyl ether; halogenated solvents such as methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and chloroform; polar solvents such as acetonitrile, propionitrile, N,N-dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidone; non-polar solvents such as toluene and benzene; and mixtures thereof. The base used varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited. Preferable examples of the base include alkali metal hydrides (such as sodium hydride and lithium hydride), alkali metal salts (such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate and cesium carbonate), metal alkoxides (such as sodium methoxide and potassium tert-butoxide) and organic bases (such as triethylamine, N,N-diisopropylethylamine, l,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene and imidazole). The reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably room temperature to 2000C, for example. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 7 days, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique, extraction or/and crystallization. The compound of the formula (d-6) is a known or commercially available compound or is a compound that can be prepared from such a compound by a conventional method. [0169] Preparation of compound of general formula (a-7) The following formula shows an example of preparation of the compound of the general formula (a-7). [0170]
Figure imgf000051_0001
[0171]
In the formula, Ri, R2, m, n, XA and P2 are as defined above; and MA represents a metal such as zinc or copper.
The compound of the general formula (a-7) can be prepared from a compound of the general formula (a-1) as a starting material through coupling reaction in Step 6-1, hydrolysis reaction and hydrazidation in Step 6-2 and deprotection reaction in Step 6-3. Alternatively, the compound can be prepared from a compound of the general formula (a-1) as a starting material through coupling reaction in Step 6-4 and deprotection reaction in Step 6-3.
Step 6-1 and Step 6-4 vary according to the starting material and are not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in these reactions. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reactions. Mizoroki-Heck reaction (see R.F. Heck, "Org. Reactions.", 1982, vol. 27, p. 345, for example), Sonogashira reaction (see K. Sonogashira, "Comprehensive Organic Synthesis", 1991, vol. 3, p. 521, for example) or the like is preferable. [0172]
In Mizoroki-Heck reaction, a halogen compound or trifiuoromethanesulfonate compound of the general formula (a-1) is preferably coupled with 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (f-2) or a compound of the general formula (f-3) (wherein Xi is preferably -CR3=CR4-) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1) in the presence of 0.01 to 0.2 equivalent of a transition metal catalyst with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1), for example. This reaction is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent from the viewpoint of handleability and stirring efficiency. The solvent used varies according to the starting material and the transition metal catalyst used, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent. Preferable examples of the solvent include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, benzene, toluene, xylene, l-methyl-2- pyrrolidone and N,N-dimethylformamide. The reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the coupling reaction, and is preferably room temperature to 1500C. This reaction is performed preferably in an inert gas atmosphere, and more preferably in a nitrogen or argon atmosphere. The transition metal catalyst is preferably a palladium complex, for example, and more preferably a known palladium complex such as palladium (II) acetate, dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0). It is also preferable to appropriately add a phosphorus ligand (preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine, tri-tert-butylphosphine or 2-(di-tert-butylphosphino)biphenyl, for example) in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed. A preferable result may be achieved in the presence of a base. The base used is not particularly limited insofar as it is used in a coupling reaction similar to this reaction. Preferable examples of the base include triethylamine, N,N-diisopropylethylamine, N5N- dicyclohexylmethylamine and tetrabutylammonium chloride. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. [0173]
The Sonogashira reaction vary according to the starting material, the solvent and the transition metal catalyst, and are not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. Preferably, a compound of the general formula (a-1) is coupled with 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (f-2) or a compound of the general formula (f- 3), wherein Xi is preferably [0174]
— C≡≡C—
[0175] with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1) in the presence of 0.01 to 0.2 equivalent of a transition metal catalyst with respect to the compound of the general formula (a- 1), for example. Preferable examples of the solvent used include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, benzene, toluene, xylene, l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N,N- dimethylformamide and dimethyl sulfoxide. More preferable examples of the solvent include tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N,N-dimethylformamide. The reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the coupling reaction, and is preferably room temperature to 1500C. This reaction is performed preferably in an inert gas atmosphere, and more preferably in a nitrogen or argon atmosphere. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. The transition metal catalyst is, for example, a known palladium complex, and more preferably a known palladium complex such as palladium (II) acetate, dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(diben2ylideneacetone)dipalladium (0). A phosphorus ligand (preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine or tritert-butylphosphine, for example) may be appropriately added, for example, in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed. In the reaction, it is possible to add a metal halide or a quaternary ammonium salt, preferably copper (I) iodide, lithium chloride, tetrabutylammonium fluoride or silver (I) oxide, for example. A preferable result may be achieved in the presence of a base. The base used here is not particularly limited insofar as it is used in a coupling reaction similar to this reaction. Preferable examples of the base include organic bases such as diethylamine, triethylamine, N5N- diisopropylethylamine, piperidine and pyridine. [0176]
The coupling reaction in Step 6-1 may also employ a compound of the general formula (f-4) (wherein Xi is preferably a single bond). A halogen compound or trifiuorornethanesulfonate group compound of the general formula (a-1) is preferably coupled with 1.0 to 5.0 equivalents of a compound of the general formula (f-4) (wherein X1 is preferably a single bond) with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1) in the presence of 0.01 to 0.2 equivalent of a transition metal catalyst with respect to the compound of the general formula (a-1), for example. This reaction is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent from the viewpoint of handleability and stirring efficiency. The solvent used varies according to the starting material and the transition metal catalyst used, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent. Preferable examples of the solvent include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4- dioxane, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, benzene, toluene, xylene, l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N5N- dimethylformamide. The reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the coupling reaction, and is preferably room temperature to 1500C. This reaction is performed preferably in an inert gas atmosphere, and more preferably in a nitrogen or argon atmosphere. The transition metal catalyst is preferably a palladium complex, for example, and more preferably a known palladium complex such as palladium (II) acetate, dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0). It is also preferable to appropriately add a phosphorus ligand (preferably triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine, tri-tert-butylphosphine or 2-(di-tert-butylphosphino)biphenyl, for example) in order to make the reaction efficiently proceed. A preferable result may be achieved in the presence of a base. The base used is not particularly limited insofar as it is used in a coupling reaction similar to this reaction. Preferable examples of the base include triethylamine, N5N-diisopropylethylamine, N5N- dicyclohexylmethylamine and tetrabutylammonium chloride. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 24 hours, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. [0177] The hydrolysis reaction as the first stage of Step 6-2 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. A method reported in many documents (such as described in The Chemical Society of Japan (ed.), Jikken Kagaku Koza (Courses in Experimental Chemistry), 4th edition (vol. 22) Yuki Gosei (Organic Synthesis) [IV], Maruzen Co., Ltd., November 1992, p. 12-13) may be used. The hydrazidation reaction as the second stage varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. An amidation reaction known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. A method reported in many documents or the like (such as described in The Chemical Society of Japan (ed.), Jikken Kagaku Koza (Courses in Experimental Chemistry), 4th edition (vol. 22) Yuki Gosei (Organic Synthesis) [IV], Maruzen Co., Ltd., November 1992, p. 137-144) may be used. [0178]
The deprotection reaction in Step 6-3 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A deprotection reaction known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. A method reported in many documents or the like (see T. Greene et al., "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis", John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1981, for example) may be used.
The compound of the formula (f-2), the compound of the formula (f-3) and the compound of the formula (f-4) are known or commercially available compounds or are compounds that can be prepared from these compounds by a conventional method. [0179] Preparation of compound of general formula (d-6)
The following formula shows an example of preparation of the compound of the general formula (d-6). [0180]
Figure imgf000055_0001
(d-7) (e-1) (d-8) (d-6)
[0181]
In the formula, X2, Xc, Ring B, Pi, L3 and L4 are as defined above.
The compound of the general formula (d-6) can be prepared from a compound of the general formula (d-7) as a starting material through alkylation reaction in Step 3-1 and imidation in Step 7-1.
Step 3-1 is performed by the same method as described above and can prepare a compound of the general formula (d-8) from a compound of the general formula (d-7). [0182]
Step 7-1 varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited insofar as the conditions are similar to those in this reaction. A method known to a person skilled in the art may be used for the reaction. Preferable examples of the method include a method of stirring the compound of the general formula (d-8) in an alcohol solvent in the presence of 5.0 to 100.0 equivalents of an acid with respect to the compound of the general formula (d-8). The acid used varies according to the starting material and is not particularly limited. Preferable examples of the acid include hydrogen chloride gas and acetyl chloride. The solvent used varies according to the starting material, and is not particularly limited insofar as it does not inhibit the reaction and allows the starting material to be dissolved therein to a certain extent. Preferable examples of the solvent include alcoholic solvents such as methanol, ethanol and tert-butanol. Preferable examples of the solvent also include halogenated solvents such as a methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and chloroform; polar solvents such as N5N- dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidone; non-polar solvents such as toluene and benzene; and mixed solvents thereof. The reaction temperature must be a temperature that can complete the reaction without promoting formation of an undesirable by-product, and is preferably 00C to 1000C, for example. Under preferable reaction conditions, the reaction is completed in 1 to 7 days, and the progress of the reaction can be monitored by a known chromatography technique. An undesirable by-product can be removed by a technique known to a person skilled in the art such as a conventional chromatography technique, extraction or/and crystallization. The compound of the formula (d-7) and the compound of the formula (e-1) are known or commercially available compounds or are compounds that can be prepared from these compounds by a conventional method. [0183]
The compound of the general formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof according to the present invention is effective for the treatment of a disease caused by Aβ and is excellent in terms of pharmacokinetics, toxicity, stability, absorption and the like.
A therapeutic agent for a disease caused by Aβ comprising the compound of the formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof according to the present invention as an active ingredient can be prepared by a conventional method. Preferable examples of the dosage form include tablets, powders, fine granules, granules, coated tablets, capsules, syrups, troches, inhalants, suppositories, injections, ointments, ophthalmic solutions, ophthalmic ointments, nasal drops, ear drops, cataplasms and lotions. The agent can be prepared by using ingredients typically used such as an excipient, a binder, a lubricant, a colorant and a corrective, and ingredients used where necessary such as a stabilizer, an emulsifϊer, an absorbefacient, a surfactant, a pH adjuster, a preservative and an antioxidant, and can be prepared by blending ingredients generally used as materials for a pharmaceutical preparation. Examples of such ingredients include animal and vegetable oils such as soybean oil, beef tallow and synthetic glyceride; hydrocarbons such as liquid paraffin, squalane and solid paraffin; ester oils such as octyldodecyl myristate and isopropyl myristate; higher alcohols such as cetostearyl alcohol and behenyl alcohol; a silicone resin; silicone oil; surfactants such as polyoxyethylene fatty acid ester, sorbitan fatty acid ester, glycerin fatty acid ester, polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid ester, polyoxyethylene hydrogenated castor oil and a polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene block copolymer; water-soluble polymers such as hydroxyethylcellulose, polyacrylic acid, a carboxyvinyl polymer, polyethylene glycol, polyvinylpyrrolidone and methylcellulose; lower alcohols such as ethanol and isopropanol; polyhydric alcohols such as glycerin, propylene glycol, dipropylene glycol and sorbitol; sugars such as glucose and sucrose; inorganic powders such as silicic anhydride, magnesium aluminum silicate and aluminum silicate; and purified water. Examples of the excipient used include lactose, corn starch, saccharose, glucose, mannitol, sorbitol, crystalline cellulose and silicon dioxide. Examples of the binder used include polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl ether, methylcellulose, ethylcellulose, gum arabic, tragacanth, gelatin, shellac, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, a polypropylene glycol-polyoxyethylene block copolymer and meglumine. Examples of the disintegrant used include starch, agar, gelatin powder, crystalline cellulose, calcium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, calcium citrate, dextrin, pectin and carboxymethylcellulose calcium. Examples of the lubricant used include magnesium stearate, talc, polyethylene glycol, silica and hydrogenated vegetable oil. Examples of the colorant used include those permitted to be added to pharmaceuticals. Examples of the corrective used include cocoa powder, menthol, empasm, mentha oil, borneol and cinnamon powder. [0184]
For example, an oral preparation is prepared by adding an active ingredient compound or a salt thereof or a hydrate of the compound or salt, an excipient, and, where necessary, a binder, a disintegrant, a lubricant, a colorant and a corrective, for example, and then forming the mixture into powder, fine granules, granules, tablets, coated tablets or capsules, for example, by a conventional method. It is obvious that tablets or granules may be appropriately coated, for example, sugar coated, where necessary. A syrup or an injection preparation is prepared by adding a pH adjuster, a solubilizer and an isotonizing agent, for example, and a solubilizing agent, a stabilizer and the like where necessary by a conventional method. An external preparation may be prepared by any conventional method without specific limitations. As a base material, any of various materials usually used for a pharmaceutical, a quasi drug, a cosmetic or the like can be used. Examples of the base material include materials such as animal and vegetable oils, mineral oils, ester oils, waxes, higher alcohols, fatty acids, silicone oils, surfactants, phospholipids, alcohols, polyhydric alcohols, water-soluble polymers, clay minerals and purified water. A pH adjuster, an antioxidant, a chelator, a preservative and fungicide, a colorant, a flavor or the like may be added where necessary. Further, an ingredient having a differentiation inducing effect such as a blood flow enhancer, a bactericide, an antiphlogistic, a cell activator, vitamin, amino acid, a humectant or a keratolytic agent may be blended where necessary. [0185]
The dose of the therapeutic agent according to the present invention varies according to the degree of symptoms, age, sex, body weight, mode of administration, type of salt and specific type of disease, for example. Typically, the compound of the formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof is orally administered to an adult at about 30 μg to 10 g, preferably 100 μg to 5 g, and more preferably 100 μg to 100 mg per day, or is administered to an adult by injection at about 30 μg to 1 g, preferably 100 μg to 500 mg, and more preferably 100 μg to 30 mg per day, in a single dose or several divided doses, respectively. [0186]
To treat a disease caused by amyloid-β such as Alzheimer's disease, senile dementia, Down's syndrome or amyloidosis, the compound of the formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof according to the present invention may be used in combination with compounds having the following mechanisms.
For example, the compounds usable in combination include cholinesterase inhibitors (e.g., donepezil, huperzine A, tacrine, rivastigmine, galantamine); AMPA receptor antagonists (e.g., 1,2-dihydropyridine compounds such as 3-(2-cyanophenyl)-5-(2-pyridyl)-l- phenyl-l,2-dihydropyridin-2-one); NMDA receptor antagonists (e.g., memantine); acetylcholine releasing stimulants (e.g., pramiracetam; aniracetam); calcium channel agonists (e.g., nefϊracetam); free radical scavengers (e.g., EGb 761); platelet activating factor antagonists (e.g., EGb 761); platelet aggregation antagonists (e.g., EGb 761, triflusal); insulin sensitizers (e.g., rosiglitazone); peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor agonists (e.g., rosiglitazone); peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor gamma agonists (e.g., rosiglitazone); monoamine oxidase B inhibitors (e.g., rasagiline, selegiline, procaine); carnitine acetyltransferase stimulants (e.g., levacecarnine); NSAIDs (e.g., triflusal, cyclooxygenase-2 inhibitors, such as celecoxib); nerve growth factor agonists (e.g., xaliproden, FPF 1070); beta-amyloid inhibitors (e.g., tarenflurbil, tramiprosate, leuprorelin-D); immunomodulators (e.g., tarenfiurbil, immune globulin, icosapentethyl ester); NF-kappa B inhibitors (e.g., tarenflurbil); thyrotropin releasing hormone (e.g., taltirelin); dopamine D2 receptor antagonists (e.g., risperidone); serotonin 2 receptor antagonists (e.g., risperidone); muscarinic Ml receptor agonists (e.g., cevimeline); alpha 1 adrenoceptor agonists (e.g., modafϊnil); serotonin 3 receptor antagonists (e.g., alosetron); dopamine D2 receptor agonists (e.g., aripiprazole); dopamine D2 receptor antagonists(e.g., aripiprazole); serotonin IA receptor agonists (e.g., aripiprazole); serotonin 2 A receptor antagonists (e.g., aripiprazole); glucocorticoid antagonists (e.g., mifepristone); progesterone antagonists (e.g., mifepristone); HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors (e.g., atorvastatin, simvastatin); adenosine uptake inhibitors (e.g., propentofylline); phosphodiesterase inhibitors (e.g., propentofylline); acetylcholine receptor agonists (e.g., choline alfoscerate); membrane permeability enhancers (e.g., choline alfoscerate); cannabinoid 1 receptor antagonists (e.g., rimonabant); cannabinoid receptor agonists (e.g,. dronabinol); angiogenesis inhibitors (e.g., paclitaxel); immunosuppressants (e.g., paclitaxel); tubulin antagonists (e.g., paclitaxel); thromboxane A synthase inhibitors (e.g., triflusal); antioxidants (e.g., idebenone); alpha adrenoreceptor antagonists (e.g., nicergoline); estrogen antagonists (e.g., conjugated estrogens, trilostane); 3-beta hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase inhibitors (e.g., trilostane); signal transduction pathway inhibitors (e.g., trilostane); melatonin receptor agonists (e.g., ramelteon); immunostimulants (e.g., immune globulin, icosapentethyl ester, procaine); HIV entry inhibitors (e.g., procaine); sodium channel antagonists (e.g., procaine); microtubule inhibitor (e.g., CPH 82); glycine NMDA agonists (e.g., cycloserine); adenosine Al receptor antagonists (e.g., KW 3902); ATPase stimulants (e.g., triacetyluridine); mitochondrial function enhancers (e.g, triacetyluridine); growth hormone releasing factor agonists (e.g., tesamorelin);. butylcholine esterase inhibitor (e.g., bisnorcymserine); alpha adrenergic receptor antagonists (e.g., nicergoline); NO synthase type II inhibitors (e.g., arundic acid); chelating agents (e.g., PBT 2); amyloid fibrillogenesis inhibitors (e.g., TTP488, PF 4494700); serotonin 4 receptor agonists (e.g., PRX 03140); serotonin 6 receptor antagonists (e.g., SB 742457); benzodiazepine receptor inverse agonists (e.g., radequinil); Ca channel antagonists (e.g., safinamide); nicotinic receptor agonists (e.g., ispronicline); and BACE inhibitor (e.g., CTS 21166). [0187]
Further, the above compounds include, for example, donepezil, huperzine A, tacrine, rivastigmine, galantamine, pramiracetam, aniracetam, nefiracetam, EGb 761, rosiglitazone, rasagiline, levacecarnine, celecoxib, 3-(2-cyanophenyl)-5-(2-pyridyl)-l-phenyl- l,2-dihydropyridin-2-one, talampanel, becampanel, memantine, xaliproden, tarenflurbil, tramiprosate, leuprorelin-D, taltirelin, risperidone, cevimeline, modafinil, alosetron, aripiprazole, mifepristone, atorvastatin, propentofylline, choline alfoscerate, FPF 1070 (CAS Number 143637- 01-8), rimonabant, dronabinol, docosahexaenoic acid, paclitaxel, triflusal, idebenone, nicergoline, conjugated estrogens, trilostane, simvastatin, selegiline, ramelteon, immune globulin, icosapentethyl ester, procaine, CPH 82, cycloserine, KW 3902 (CAS Number 136199- 02-5), triacetyluridine, estrogen dementia therapeutics (e.g., MIGENIX, Vancouver, Canada), tesamorelin, bisnorcymserine, nicergoline, arundic acid, PBT 2, TTP488, PF 4494700, PRX 03140, SB 742457, radequinil, safinamide, ispronicline, CTS 21166, Bapineuzumab, NP 031112, (2S,3aS,7aS)-l {[(R,R)-2-Phenylcyclopropyl]carbonyl}-2-[(thiazolidin-3-yl)carbonyl]octahydro- lH-indole, citalopram, venlafaxine, levprorelin, prasterone, peptide T (CAS Number 53-43-0), besipiridine, lexipafant, stacofylline, SGS 742 (CAS Number 123690-78-8), T 588 (CAS Number 142935-03-3), nerispiridine, dexanabinol, sabcomeline, GTS 21 (CAS Number 156223- 05-1), CX 516 (CAS Number 154235-83-3), ABT 089 (CAS Number 161417-03-4), anapsos, tesofensine, SIB 1553 A (i.e., 4-[[2-(l-methyl-2-pyrrolidinyl)ethyl]thio]phenol), ladostigil, radequinil, GPI 1485, ispronicline, arundic acid, MEM 1003 (i.e., 3-Isopropyl 5-(2-methoxyl) 4- (2-chloro-3-cyanophenyl)-2,6-dimethylpyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate), V 3381 (i.e., 2 -(2,3- Dihydro-lH-inden-3-ylamino)acetamide hydrochloride), farampator, paliroden, prasterone- paladin, urocortin, DP b99 (i.e., 2,2'-(Ethylenedioxy)bis(2,l-phenylene)bis[N-[2-[2- (octyloxy)ethoxy]-2-oxoethyl]imino]bis(acetic acid)), capserod, DU 125530, bapineuzumab, AL 108 (i.e., L-Asparaginyl-L-alanyl-L-prolyl-L-valyl-L-seryl-L-isoleucyl-L-prolyl-L-glutamine), DAS 431, DEBIO 9902, DAR 100, mitoquinone, IPL 455903 (i.e., 5(S)-[3-(Cyclopentyloxy)-4- methoxyphenyl]-3(S)-(3-methylbenzyl)piρeridin-2-one), E2CDS, PYM 50028, PBT 2, lecozotan, SB 742457, CX 717, AVE 1625 (i.e., l-(bis(4-chlorophenyl)methyl)-3-((3,5- difluorophenyl)(methylsulfonyl)methylene)azetidine), LY 450139 (i.e., N2-[2(s)-Hydroxy-3- methylbutyryl]-Nl -[3-methyl-2-oxo-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro- 1 H-3-benzazepin- 1 (S)-yl]-L- alaninamide), EM 1421 (i.e., 4,4'-[(2R,3S)-2,3-Dimethylbutane-l,4-diyl]bis(l,2- dimethoxybenzene), SRN 001, TTP 488, PRX 03140, dimebolin, glycine-proline-glutamate, C 105, AL 208, MEM 3454, AC 1202, L 830982, LY 451395 (i.e., (R)-N-[2-[4(- (methylsulfonamidomethyl)biphenyl-4-yl]propyl]propane-2-sulfonamide), MK 0249, LY 2062430, diethylnorspermine, neboglamine, S 18986, SA 4503 (CAS Number 165377-44-6), GRI 1, S 17092 (i.e., (2S,3aS,7aS)-l {[(R, R)-2-Phenylcyclopropyl]carbonyl}-2-[(thiazolidin-3- yl)carbonyl]octahydro-lH-indole), SL 251188, EUK 189, R 1450, 6,6-dimethyl-3-(2- hydroxyethyl)thio-l-(tbiazol-2-yl)-6,7-dihydro-2-benzothiophen-4(5H)-one, CERE 110, dexefaroxan, CAD 106, HF 0220, HF 0420, EHT 0202, VP 025, MEM 1414, BGC 201259 (i.e., N,N-Dimethylcarbamic acid, 4-[l(S)-(methylamino)-3-(4-nitrophenoxy)propyl]phenyl ester), EN 100, ABT 834, ABT 239 (i.e., 4-[2-[2-[(2R)-2-Methylpyrrolidinyl]ethyl]-benzoruran-5- yl]benzonitrile), SGS 518, R 1500, C 9138, SSR 180711, alfatradiol, R 1577, T 817MA (i.e., 1- [3-[2-(l-Benzothien-5-yl)ethoxy]ρropyl]azetidin-3-olmaleate), CNP 1061 (i.e., 4-Methyl-5-(2- nitrooxyethyl)thiazole), KTX 0101 (i.e., sodium beta-hydroxybutyrate), GSK 189254 (i.e., 6-[3- Cyclobutyl-2,3,4,54etrahydro-lH-benzo[d]azepin-7-yloxy]-N-methylnicotinamide), AZD 1080, ACC 001, PRX 07034, midazolam, R-phenserine, AZD 103 (CAS Number 488-59-5), SN 522, NGX 267 (CAS Number 503431-81-0), N-PEP-12, RN 1219, FGLL, AVE 8112, EVT 101, NP 031112, MK 0752, MK 0952, LX 6171, PAZ 417, AV 965, PF 3084014, SYN 114, GSI 953, SAM 315, SAM 531, D-serine, leteprinim potassium, BR 16A (CAS Number 149175-77-9), RPR 107393 (CAS Number 190841-57-7), NXD 2858, REN 1654, CDD 0102, NC 1900 (CAS Number 132925-74-7), ciclosporin, NCX 2216 (i.e., (E)-4-(Nitrooxy)butyl 3-[4-[2-(2- fluorobiphenyl-4-yl)propanoyloxy]-3-methoxyphenyl]acrylate), NXD 3109, NXD 1191, ZSET 845 (Le., 3,3-diphenylimidazo[l,2-a]pyridin-2-(3H)-one), ET 002, NT 13, RO 638695 (i.e., [1,6- (1 ,6-dioxohexyl)] dipyrrolidine-(2R)-carboxylic acid), bisnorcymserine, BA 1016, XD 4241 , EUK 207 (i.e., (SP-5-13)-(acetato-κO)[13,16,19,22-tetraoxa-3,6- diazatricyclo[21.3.18,12]octacosa- 1 (27),2,6,8, 10, 12(28),23,25-octaene-27,28-diolato(2-)- κN3,κN6,κO27,κO28]manganese), LG 617 inhibitors, ZSET 1446, PAN 811, F 14413 (i.e., 2-[5- fluoro-2(S)-methoxy-2,3 -dihydro- 1 ,4-benzodioxin-2-yl]-4,5-dihydro- 1 H-imidazole), FP 7832 (i.e., N-[2-(5-methoxy-l-nitroso-lH-indol-3-yl)ethyl]acetamide), ARA 014418 (i.e., N-(4- methoxybenzyl)-Nt-(5-nitro-l,3-thiazol-2-yl)urea), AZD 3102, KP 544 (i.e., 2-amino-5-(4- chlorophenylethynyl)-4-(4-trans-hydroxycyclohexylamino)pyrimidine), DP 155, 5-chloro-N-[3- [2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-lH-indol-5-yl]naphthalene-2-sulfonamide, TAK 070, huperzine, N-[2- (3,5-dimethyladamant-l -yl)ethyl]acetamidine hydrochloride, 6-[4-[(dimethylamino)methyl]-5- ethyl-2-methoxyphenyl]pyridin-2-amine, 4,6-diphenyl-3 -(4-(pyrimidin-2-yl)piperazin- 1 - yl)pyridazine, N-[(lS,2R)-3-(3,5-difluorophenyl)-l-hydroxy-l-[(5S,6R)-5-methyl-6- (neopentyloxy)moφholin-3-yl]propan-2-yl]acetamide hydrochloride, N-[(lR,2S)-3-(3,5- difluorophenyl)- 1 -hydroxy- 1 -[(2R,4R)-4-phenoxypyrrolidin-2-yl]propan-2-yl]-3-[(R)-2- (methoxymethyl)pyrrolidine-l-carbonyl]-5-methylbenzamide, R 1589, midafotel, phenserine, coluracetam, physostigmine, cipralisant, nitroflurbiprofen, PPI 1019 (i.e., (3α, 5β, 7α, 12α)- trihydroxycholan-24-oyl-L-leucyl-L-valyl-L-phenylalanyl-L-phenylalanyl-L-alanine), dapsone, MDL 100453 (CAS Number 129938-34-7), NS 377, midaxifylline, propofol phosphate, metrifonate, ceronapril, tenilsetam, sufoxazine, seglitide, ebiratide, nebracetam, milacemide, iododoxorubicin, SM 10888 (CAS Number 129297-21-8), U 80816 (CAS Number 138554-11- 7), YM 954 (CAS Number 132041-85-1), SUT 8701 (CAS Number 123577-73-1), apovincamine, FR 121196 (CAS Number 133920-65-7), LY 274614 (CAS Number 136109-04- 1), CL 275838 (CAS Number 115931-65-2), igmesine, K 7259 (CAS Number 133667-88-6), vinconate, itasetron, CL 287663 (CAS Number 125109-98-0), WAY 100289 (CAS Number 136013-69-9), SR 46559A (CAS Number 137733-33-6), GYKI 46903 (CAS Number 142999- 59-5), L 670548 (CAS Number 121564-89-4), Y 29794 (CAS Number 129184-48-1), AF 125 (CAS Number 7631-86-9), KFM 19 (CAS Number 133058-72-7), ST 796 (i.e., (S)-3-[3- (trifluoromethyl)benzoyl)amino]hexahydroazepin-2-one), RU 33965 (CAS Number 122321-05- 5), SDZ 210086 (i.e., (-)-l',2(S)-Dimethylspiro[l,3-dioxane-4,4'-ρiperidine]), L 689660 (CAS Number 144860-79-7), L 689560 (CAS Number 139051-78-8), ST 618 (i.e., l-(6,7-Dimethoxy- 1,2,3 ,4-tetrahydro-2- naphthyl)-4-hydroxy pyrrolidm-2-one), U 74500A (CAS Number 110101-65-0), GEA 857 (CAS Number 120493-42-7), BIBN 99 (CAS Number 145301-48-0), DX 9366, ONO 1603 (CAS Number 114668-76-7), MDL 102234 (CAS Number 137766-81-5), P 9939 (CAS Number 157971-37-4), PD 140532 (CAS Number 157971-39-6), azetirelin, MR 16728 (CAS Number 147614-21-9), dabelotine, MDL 102503 (i.e., 8-[l(R)-methyl-2-phenylethyl]-l,3-dipropyl-7H- xanthine), PD 141606 (i.e., (±)-(Z)-3-(3-Phenyl-2-propynyloxyimino)-l- azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane), SNK 882 (CAS Number 152221-12-0), L 696986 (CAS Number 141553-45-9), tazomeline, LY 235959 (CAS Number 137433-06-8), 2-(2-thiooxopyrrolidin-l- yl)acetamide, AK 30 NGF, ABT 418 (CAS Number 147402-53-7), itameline, HUP 13, sibopirdine, KST 5452 (CAS Number 157998-88-4), TJ 54, U 92798 (i.e., 7-[4-[Bis(4- fluorophenyl)methyl]perhydro-l,4-diazepin-l-ylmethyl]-4-isopropyl-2-methoxy-2,4,6- cycloheptatrien-1-one), U 92032 (CAS Number 142223-92-5), 3-(sulfamoyloxy)estra-l,3,5(10)- trien-17-one, P 11012 (CAS Number 164723-36-8), A 82695 (CAS Number 147388-86-1), FR 76659 (CAS Number 116904-25-7), apaxifylline, CX 417, 7 MEOTA (CAS Number 5778-80-3), BU 4514N (CAS Number 151013-39-7), pregnenolone, mexidol, ST 857 (CAS Number 154755- 63-2), RU 49041 (CAS Number 123828-80-8), RU 35929 (CAS Number 111711-47-8), P 878184, P 128 (CAS Number 157716-52-4), eurystatin A, eurystatin B, LK 12, NBI 108, NBI 107, NBI 117, L 705106, bacoside A+B, clausenamide, SM 21 (CAS Number 155156-22-2), alaptide, RS 17017 (i.e., l-^-Amino-S-chloro^-methoxyphenyty-S-tl-piperidinyO-l-pentanone hydrochloride), AF 150(S) (i.e., (S)-[l-Methyl-piperidine-4-spiro-(2'-methylthiazoline)]), RO 153505 (CAS Number 78771-13-8), PV 113 (i.e., l,2,3,4-Tetrahydropyrrole-[l,2-a]-pyrazine), arisugacin, A 98284 (i.e., 2(R)-(3-Methyloxazol-5-yl) quinuclidine), AP 5 (CAS Number 136941 -85-0), BD 1054, SDZ NDD 094 (i.e., bis-(2-(2-methylimidazol- 1 -yl]methyl)-pyridine- tris(hydrogen-fumarate), AZ 36041 (CAS Number 173324-76-0), quilostigmine, A 84543 (i.e., 3- [l-Methylpyrrolidin-2-(S)-yhnethoxy]pyridine fumarate), BTG 4247 (i.e., (2-[2-Chloroethoxy[4- (dimethylamino)phenyl]phosphoryl]-acetohydrazine), CGP 50068 (CAS Number 158647-49-5), cerebrocrast, desferri-nordanoxamine, isolichenan, MHP 133 (i.e., 3-(N5N- dimethylcarbamoyloxy)- 1 -methyl-2-(4-phenyl-semicarbazonomethyl)pyridium chloride), FR 152558 (CAS Number 151098-08-7), GVS 111 (CAS Number 157115-85-0), P 11149 (CAS Number 164724-79-2), PDC 008004, KST 2818 (CAS Number 158623-26-8), KST 5410 (CAS Number 158623-27-9), RU 52583 (CAS Number 123829-33-4), PD 151832 (CAS Number 149929-39-5), UCL 1199 (i.e., 4-[2-[(5-Nitropyridin-2-ylsulfanyl)ethyl]-lH-imidazole), isovanihuperzine A, SIB 1765F (CAS Number 179120-52-6), JWS USC 751X (i.e., 3-[[[2-[[(5- dimemylammoemyl)-2-furanyl]memyl]thio]emyl]ammo]-4-nitropyridazine), GR 175737 (i.e., 3- (4-Chlorobenzyl)-5-[2-(lH-imidazol-4-yl)ethyl]-l,2,4-oxadiazole), KS 505A (CAS Number 131774-53-3), ZTTA 1 (i.e., N-benzyloxycarbonyl-thiopropyl-thiopropynal-dimethylacetal), AGN 190837 (CAS Number 136527-40-7), P 10358 (188240-59-7), WAY 131256 (CAS Number 174001-71-9), DBO 83 (i.e., 3-(6-chloropyrazin-3-yl)-diazabicyclo[3.2.1]octane dihydrochloride monohydrate), FUB 181 (CAS Number 152029-80-6), RJR 2557, WSU 2088, LW-haemoφhin-7, M 40 (i.e., galanin[l-l 2] -Pro3-(Ala-Leu)2- AIa-NH2), SIB 1757, SKF 74652 (i.e., [5-chloro-2-(4-methoxy phenyl)-3-benzofuranyl] [4-[3-(dimethylamino)- propoxy]phenyl]methanone), CGP 71982, SCH 57790 (i.e., 4-cyclohexyl-alpha-[4-[[4- methoxyphenyl]sulfinyl]phenyl]-l-piperazineacetonitrile), Putrescine-D-YiAbetall, DU 14 (i.e., p-O-(sulfamoyl)-N-tetradecanoyl tyramine), CLZ 4, SL 340026, PPRT 424, ciproxifan, UR 1827 (i.e., 2-(l-ben.^lpiperidin-4-yl)-l-[4-(5-memylpyrimidin-4-ylamino)phenyl]-l-ethanone), caproctamine, TGS 20 (i.e., L-pyroglutamil-D-alanine amide), PG 9 (i.e., alpha-tropanyl 2-[(4- bromo)phenyl]propionate), TEI 3356 (i.e., (16S)-15-Deoxy-16-hydroxy-16-methyl-9-(O)- methano-DELTA6(9alρha)-prostaglandin II), LY 392098 (i.e., Thiophene, 3-[(2-methylethyl- 2)sulphonylaminoρroρyl-2]phenyl-4-yl-), PG 1000, DM 232, NEPP 11 (i.e., 12-iso-15-Deoxy- 18-(4-methyl)phenyl-13,14-dihydro-delta7-prostaglandinAl methyl ester), VA 100 (i.e., (2,3- Dihydro-2-[[(4-fluorobenzoyl)amino]ethyl]-l-methyl-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepine), VA lOl (i.e., (2,3-dihydro-2-[[(2-thienylcarbonyl)amino]ethyl]-l-methyl-5-phenyl-lH-l,4- benzodiazepine), NC 111585 (i.e., (3S)-l,3-Bis-[3-[(3-azabicylo[2.2.2]octanyl)-l,2,5-thiadiazol- 4-yloxy]-l-propyn-l-yl]benzene, 2L-(+)-tartate), IN 201, imoproxifan, kanokodiol, picroside I, picroside II, DM 235 (i.e., l-(4-BenzoyIpiperazin-l-yl)propan-l-one), monoclonal antibody 10D5, JLK2, JLK 6, JLK 7, DAPT (i.e., N-[N-(3,5-difluorophenacetyl)-L-alanyl]-S- phenylglycine t-butyl ester), huperine X, SGS 111 (i.e., (S)-ethyl 2-[l -(2- phenylacetyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamido]acetate), NP 7557, C 9136, C 7617, R 1485, rofecoxib, velnacrine, montirelin, lazabemide, ORG 2766 (CAS Number 50913-82-1), sabeluzole, adafenoxate, CAS Number 9061-61-4, ipidacrine, bemesetron, idazoxan, linopirdine, selfotel, suritozole, milameline, xanomeline, TJ 960, fasoracetam, eptastigmine, ensaculin, zanapezil, posatirelin, zacopride, RS 86 (CAS Number 3576-73-6), ORG 5667 (CAS Number 37552-33-3), RX 77368 (CAS Number 76820-40-1), BMS 181168 (CAS Number 123259-91-6), BY 1949 (CAS Number 90158-59-1), AWD 5239 (CAS Number 109002-93-9), YM 796 (171252-79-2), aloracetam, CI 933 (CAS Number 91829-95-7), ST 793 (CAS Number 99306-37-3), cebaracetam, zifrosilone, talsaclidine, alvameline, JTP 2942 (148152-77-6), OPC 14117 (CAS Number 103233-65-4), elziverine, AP 521 (i.e., N-(l,3-Benzodioxol-5-ylmethyl)-l,2,3,4- tetrahydro[l]benzothieno[2,3-c]pyridine-3(R)-carboxamide hydrochloride), S 8510 (CAS Number 151466-23-8), JTP 4819 (CAS Number 162203-65-8), icopezil, SC 110, FK 960 (CAS Number 133920-70-4), DMP 543 (CAS Number 160588-45-4), ganstigmine, CI 1017 (i.e., (R)- (-)-(Z)- 1 - Azabicyclo [2.2.1 ]heptan-3 -one, O-(3 -(3 '-methoxyphenyl)-2-propionyl)-oxime maleate), T 82 (i.e., 2-[2-(l-Benzylpiperidin-4-yl)ethyl]-2,3-dihydro-9-methoxy-lH-pyrrolo[3,4- b]quinolin-l-one hemifumarate), NGD 971, vaccine of Aspartyl-alanyl-glutamyl-phenylalanyl- arginyl-histidyl-aspartyl-seryl-glycyl-tyrosyl-glutamyl-valyl-histidyl- histidyl-glutaminyl-lysyl- leucyl-valyl-phenylalanyl-phenylalanyl-alanyl-glutamyl-aspartyl-valyl-glycyl-seryl-asparaginyl- lysyl-glycyl- alanyl-isoleucyl-isoleucyl-glycyl-leucyl-methionyl-valyl-glycyl-glycyl-valyl-valyl- isoleucyl-alanine, PBT 1 (CAS Number 130-26-7), TCH 346, FK 962 (i.e., N-(l-acetylpiperidin- 4-yl)-4-fluorobenzamide), voxergolide, KW 6055 (CAS Number 63233-46-5), thiopilocarpine, ZK 93426 (CAS Number 89592-45-0), SDZ NVI 085 (CAS Number 104195-17-7), CI 1002 (CAS Number 149028-28-4), Z 321 (CAS Number 130849-58-0), mirisetron, CHF 2060 (i.e., N- Heptylcarbamic acid 2,4a,9-trimethyl-2,3,4,4a,9,9a-hexahydro-l ,2-oxazino[6,5-b]indol-6-yl ester-L-tartrate), gedocarnil, terbequinil, HOE 065 (CAS Number 123060-44-6), SL 650102, GR 253035, ALE 26015, SB 271046 (i.e., 5-Chloro-N-(4-methoxy-3-piperazin-l-yl-phenyl)-3- methyl-2-benzothiophenesulfonamide), iAbeta5, SCH 211803 (i.e., Piperidine, l-[l-(3-methyl-2- aminophenyl)carbonylpiperidin-4-yl]-4-[(3-chlorophenyl)sulphonylphenyl-4]methyl-), EVT 301 , alpha-Linolenic acid/linoleic acid, Kamikihi-To, siagoside, FG 7142 (CAS Number 78538-74-6), RU 47067 (CAS Number 111711-92-3), RU 35963 (CAS Number 139886-03-6), FG 7080 (CAS Number 100332-18-1), E 2030 (CAS Number 142007-70-3), transforming growth factor beta-1, A 72055 (i.e., 2',l-Dimethylspiro[piperidine-4,5Oxazolidine]-3'-carboxaldehyde), NS 626, dimiracetam, GT 3001, GT 2501, GT 2342, GT 2016 (CAS Number 152241-24-2), ORG 20091 (CAS Number 141545-50-8), BCE 001 (CAS Number 95678-81-2), CGP 35348 (CAS Number 123690-79-9), WAY 100635 (CAS Number 146714-97-8), E 4804 (CAS Number 162559-34-4), LIGA 20 (CAS Number 126586-85-4), NG 121 (i.e., 2-[4,8-Dimethyl-3(E),7(E)-monoadienyl]- 3,5-dihydroxy-2-methyl-3,4,7,9-tetrahydro-2H-fluoro[3,4-h]-l-benzopyran-7-one), MF 247 (i.e., N-[10-(Diethylamino)decyl]carbamic acid (3aS,8aR)- 1 ,3a,8-trimethyl- 1 ,2,3,3a,8,8a- hexahydroρyrrolo[2,3-b]indol-5-yl ester), JTP 3399 (i.e., N-Benzyl-2(S)-[2(S)-
(phenoxyacety^pyrrolidin-l-ylcarbonyljpyrrolidine-l-carboxamide), KF 17329, thioperamide, F 3796 (i.e., l-[2-(l-Benzylpiperidin-4-yl)ethyl]-3-[3,4-(methylene-dioxy)benzoyl]thiourea), GT 4001, GT 4002, FPL 14995 (CAS Number 123319-03-9), RU 34332 (CAS Number 137157-58- 5), SR 96777A (CAS Number 115767-94-7), SIB T1980, NS 649 (CAS Number 146828-02-6), PD 142505 (CAS Number 149929-08-8), GYKI 52466 (CAS Number 102771-26-6), RO 246173 (CAS Number 159723-57-6), SCH 50911 (CAS Number 160415-07-6), Z 4105 (CAS Number 119737-52-9), RS 67333 (CAS Number 168986-60-5), NS 1546, ZM 241385 (CAS Number 139180-30-6), RO 249975 (i.e., [lS,3S(2'S),5R]-3-(l-Benzyl-5-oxopyrrolidin-2- ylmethyl)-5-(lH-imidazol-5-ylmethyl)cyclohexane-l-acetamide), AF 185 (i.e., 8-Methyl-3-(2- ρroρynyl)-l ,3,8-triazaspiro[4,5]decane-2,4-dione), CEP 427, CX 423, CX 438, CX 480, CDP- ethanolamine, GT 4003, GT 4011, GT 5011, MS 430 (CAS Number 122113-44-4), MBF 379 (i.e., [3,3-Bis(hydroxymethyl)-8-hydroxy-3,4-dihydro-2H-l,4-benzoxazin-5-yl][3',5'-dihydroxy- 4'-(2-oxo-2-phenylethoxy)ρhenyl]methanone), NGD 187 (CAS Number 163565-48-8), DUP 856, MR 3066, MF 8615 (i.e., 5-Amino-6-chloro-4-hydroxy-3,4-dihydro-lH-thiopyrano-[3,4- b]quinolinone), himbacine, ABS 300, RJR 2403 (CAS Number 538-79-4), MF 268 (CAS Number 174721-00-7), RO 465934 (i.e., N,N-Dimethylcarbamic acid 3-(2-cyclohexyl)- 2,3,3a,4,5,9b-hexahydro-lH-benzo[e]indol-6-yl ester), NS 393, RGH 2716 (CAS Number 134069-68-4), WIN 678702 (12,12-Bis(3-furyl)-6,ll-dihydro-6,ll-ethanobenzo[b]quinolizinium chloride), RS 66252 (i.e., l-Butyl-2-[(2'-(2H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-yl)methyl]-lH-indole-3- carboxylic acid), AIT 034 (CAS Number 138117-48-3), NG 012 (CAS Number 131774-53-3), PD 142012 (CAS Number 5778-84-7), GT 4054, GT 4077, GT 4035, P 26 (CAS Number 152191-74-7), RGH 5279 (i.e.,
(-)-(l 3aR, 13bS)-l 3a-Ethyl-2,3,5,6, 13a, 13b-hexahydro- lH-indolo[3,2, 1 -de]pyrido[3,2, 1 - ij][l,5]naphthyridine-12-carboxylic acid 2-acetoxyethyl ester), AIT 083, CeNeS, estradiol (i.e., l,3,5(10)-Estratriene-3,17beta-diol), WAY 132983 ((3R,4R)-3-(3-hexasulfanylρyrazin-2-yloxy)- l-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heρtane hydrochloride), ABS 205, ABS 401, SX 3507 (i.e., 3-(3-Proρyl- l,2,4-oxadiazol-5-yl)quinoxaline-2(lH)-one), ARR 17779 (i.e., (-)-Spiro[l- azabicyclo[2.2.2]octaene-3,5-oxazolidine]-2-one), XE 991 (i.e., 10,10-bis(4- Pyridylmethyl)anthracen-10(9H)-one), phenethylnorcymserine, RO 657199, RJR 1781 (i.e., R(+)-2-(3-pyridyl)-l-azabicyclo[2.2.2.]octane), RJR 1782 (i.e., S(-)-2-(3-pyridyl)-l- azabicyclo[2.2.2.]octane), gilatide, tolserine, TC 2559 (i.e., (E)-N-Methyl-4-[3-(5- ethoxypyridin)yl]-3-buten-l -amine), ER 127528 (i.e., l-(3-Fluorobenzyl)-4-[(2-fluoro-5,6- dimethoxy-l-indanone-2-yl)methyl]piperidine hydrochloride), thiatolserine, targacept, axonyx, cymserine, thiacymserine, monoclonal antibody 266, Apan-CH, DP 103, SPI 339 (i.e., 4-[3-(4- Oxo-4,5,6,7-tetrahydroindol-l-yl)propionylamino]benzoic acid ethyl ester), S 37245 (i.e., 4-(l,4- Benzodioxan-5-yl)-l-[3(S)-hydroxy-5-nitro-indan-2-yl]-piperazine), LLG 88, AZD 2858, trometamol, AN 240, NG 002 (i.e., 5-Hydroxy-5-(2-hydroxy-l-methylethyl)-4-methoxyturan- 2(5H)-one), UCB 29427 (i.e., 2-Cyclopropyl-4-(cyclopropylamino)-6-(morpholino)- 1,3,5 - triazine), TRH-SR, RO 401641 (CAS Number 122199-02-4), MPV 1743AIII (CAS Number 150586-64-4), IDRA 21 (CAS Number 22503-72-6), CEP 431, ACPD (CAS Number 67684-64- 4), CT 3577 (i.e., 3,7-Dimethyl-l-[ll-(3,4,5-Mmemoxybenzylamino)-ll-oxoundecyl]xanthine), CT 2583, NXD 9062, Desferri-nordanoxamine, DP b99, PBT 1, T 817MA, Alfatradiol (CAS No. 57-91-0), AL 108, SL 650102, RS 67333 (CAS No. 168986-60-5), RS 17017, SGS 518, SYN 114, SB 271046, RO 657199, PRX 07034, Suritozole (CAS No. 110623-33-19), Terbequinil
(CAS No. 113079-82-6), FG 7142 (CAS No. 78538-74-6). RU 34332 (CAS No. 137157-58-5), SX 3507, RO 153505 (CAS No. 78771-13-8), RU 33965 (CAS No. 122321-05-5), S 8510 (CAS No. 151466-23-8), Sabeluzole (CAS No. 104383-17-7), Cerebrocrast (CAS No. 118790-71-9), NS 626, NS 649 (CAS No. 146828-02-6), U 92032 (CAS No. 142223-92-5), MEM 1003, U 92798, RGH 2716 (CAS No. 134069-68-4), Safmamide (CAS No. 133865-89-1), AZD 0328, MEM 63908, ABT 418 (CAS No. 147402-53-7), ARR 17779, RJR 2403 (CAS No. 538-79-4), TC 2559, A 82695 (CAS No. 147388-86-1), A 84543, A 98284, DBO 83, RJR 2557, SIB 1765F (CAS No. 179120-52-6), GTS 21 (CAS No. 156223-05-1), MEM 3454, SIB 1553A, EVP 6124, SSR 180711, ABT 089 (CAS No. 161417-03-4), ABT 107, ABT 560, TC 5619, TAK 070, N- [(lS,2R)-3-(3,5-Difluorophenyl)-l-hydroxy-l-[(5S,6R)-5-methyl-6-(neopentyloxy)morpholin-3- yl]propan-2-yl]acetamide hydrochloride, 6-Fluoro-5-(2-fluoro-5-methylphenyl)-3,4- dihydropyridine, 2- Amino-6- [2-(3 '-methoxybiphenyl-3 -yl)ethyl] -3 ,6-dimethyl-5 ,6- hydroxypyrimidin-4(3H)-one, AZD 1080, ARA 014418, XD 4241, Z 321 (CAS No. 130849-58- 0), ONO 1603 (CAS No. 114668-76-7), JTP 3399, Eurystatin A (C AS No. 137563-63-4), Eurystatin B (CAS No. 137563-64-5), P 128 (CAS No. 157716-52-4), Y 29794(CAS No. 129184-48-1), ZTTA 1, JTP 4819 (CAS No. 162203-65-8), Monoclonal antibody 266, duloxetine, escitalopram oxalate, fluoxetine, fluvoxamine maleate, paroxetine, sertraline, dapoxetine, desvenlafaxine, sibutramine, nefazodone, milnacipran, desipramine, duloxetine, and bicifadine. [0188]
The present invention will now be described in detail with reference to examples; however, the examples are provided only for illustration purposes. The therapeutic agent for a disease caused by Aβ according to the present invention is not limited to the following specific examples in any cases. A person skilled in the art can fully implement the present invention by making various modifications to not only the following reference examples and examples but also the claims of the present specification, and such modifications are within the scope of the claims of the present specification.
When example compounds have stereoisomers, the names of compounds with optical rotation may not necessarily correspond to the structural formulas sequentially in the following examples, if the absolute configuration is not determined. [0189]
The following abbreviations are used in the following examples.
DMF: N,N-Dimethylformamide THF: Tetrahydrofuran
EDC: l-Ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride
HOBT: 1-Hydroxybenzotriazole
IPEA: Diisopropylethylamine
TEA: Triethylamine BOPCl: Bis(2-oxo-3-oxazolidinyl)phosphonic chloride
Chromatography was performed using BW-300 manufactured by Fuji Silysia Chemical Ltd. as a carrier unless otherwise specified.
EXAMPLES [0190] Examples 1 and 2
(+)-8-(4-Fluoro-2-trifluoromethylphenvn-2- ( f EV2-r6-methoxy-5-(4-methyl- 1 H-imidazol- 1 - yl)pyrazin-2-yl]vinvU-5,6,7<8-tetrahydro-[l .2.41triazolo[l ,5-a]pyridine and (-)-8-(4-fluoro-2- trifluoromethylphenylV2- ((E)-2-[6-methoxy-5-(4-methyl- 1 H-imidazol- 1 -yl)pyrazin-2-yl1 vinyl ) - 5,6.7.8-tetrahvdro-ri.2.41triazoloπ.5-alpyridine [0191]
Figure imgf000068_0001
[0192]
(E)-3-[6-Methoxy-5-(4-methyl-lH-imidazol-l-yl)-pyrazin-2-yl]acrylic acid hydrazide trihydrochloride obtained in Reference Example 2 (4.7 g) and imidazole (10 g) were added to a solution of ethyl 5-chloro-2-(4-fluoro-2-trifluoromethylphenyl)pentanimidate hydrochloride obtained in Reference Example 4 (5.2 g) in methanol (228 mL), followed by stirring at room temperature for seven days. Then, the reaction solution was stirred at 5O0C for 28 hours. Ethyl acetate (200 mL), 10% saline (100 ml), 5 N hydrochloric acid (20 mL) and water (300 mL) were sequentially added to the reaction solution, and then the organic layer was separated. The aqueous layer was reextracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain 5.7 g of a racemate of the title compound. The resulting racemate was separated by CHIRALPAK™ IC manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd. (2 cm x 25 cm; mobile phase: acetonitrile:methanol = 3:7, flow rate: 15 mL/min) to obtain the title optically active compound with a retention time of 10.1 minutes resulting from analysis by CHIRALPAK™ IB manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd. (4.6 mm x 150 mm, mobile phase: hexane:ethanol = 85:15, flow rate: 1.0 mL/min, 400C) and positive optical rotation (1.21 g, 94% ee) and the title optically active compound with a retention time of 9.25 minutes resulting from the same analysis and negative optical rotation (1.09 g, >99% ee).
The property values of the title optically active compound with positive optical rotation are as follows. ESI-MS; m/z 500 [W +H]. 1 H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 1.87-1.96 (m, IH), 2.13-2.29 (m, 2H), 2.29 (s, 3H), 2.42-2.48 (m, IH), 4.14 (s, 3H), 4.27-4.41 (m, 2H), 4.64 (dd, J = 5.6, 8.8 Hz, IH), 7.03 (dd, J = 5.2, 8.8 Hz, IH), 7.17-7.22 (m, IH), 7.44 (dd, J = 2.8, 9.2 Hz, IH), 7.45 (d, J = 15.6 Hz, IH), 7.58 (m, IH), 7.61 (d, J = 15.6 Hz, IH), 7.93 (s, IH), 8.44 (d, J = 1.6 Hz, IH).
The property values of the title optically active compound with negative optical rotation are as follows. ESI-MS; m/z 500 [M+ +H].
1 H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 1.87-1.96 (m, IH), 2.12-2.31 (m, 2H), 2.29 (s, 3H), 2.42-2.48 (m, IH), 4.14 (s, 3H), 4.27-4.41 (m, 2H), 4.64 (dd, J = 5.6, 8.8 Hz, IH), 7.03 (dd, J = 5.2, 8.8 Hz, IH), 7.17-7.22 (m, IH), 7.44 (dd, J = 2.8, 9.2 Hz, IH), 7.45 (d, J = 15.6 Hz, IH), 7.58 (m, IH), 7.61 (d, J = 15.6 Hz, IH), 7.93 (s, IH), 8.44 (d, J = 1.6 Hz, IH). [0193]
Examples 3 and 4
(+V8-(2.4-DifluorophenylV2-{(EV2-r6-methoxy-5-(4-methyl-lH-imidazol-l-yl)pyrazin-2- vnvinvU-5.6.7.8-tetrahvdro-ri.2.41triazolori.5-a1pyridine and (-)-8-(2.4-difluorophenvπ-2-((E)- 2-r6-methoxy-5-(4-methyl- 1 H-imidazol-1 -yl)pyrazin-2-yl] vinyl} -5,6,7.8-tetrahvdro- [ 1 ,2,4]triazolo[ 1 ,5-alpyridine
Figure imgf000069_0001
[0195]
Tris(dibenzylieneacetone)dipalladium (140 mg), tri(o-tolyl)phosphine (93.1 mg) and TEA (358 uL) were added to a suspension of 8-(2,4-difiuoro-phenyl)-2-vinyl-5,6,7,8- tetrahydro[l,2,4]triazolo[l,5-a]pyridine obtained in Reference Example 5 (200 mg) and 5- bromo-3-methoxy-2-(4-methyl-lH-imidazol-l-yl)pyrazine obtained in Reference Example 1 (226 mg) in toluene (13.3 mL), followed by stirring at 1100C for 18 hours. The solid in the reaction solution was removed by filtration through celite, and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (carrier: Chromatorex™ NH manufactured by Fuji Silysia Chemical Ltd.(hereinafter abbreviated as "NH silica gel")) to obtain 124 mg of a racemate of the title compound. The resulting racemate was separated by CHIRALPAK™ IC manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd. (2 cm x 25 cm; mobile phase: acetonitrile:methanol = 3:7, flow rate: 13 mL/min) to obtain the title optically active compound with a retention time of 4.5 minutes resulting from analysis by CHIRALPAK™ IC manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd. (4.6 mm x 150 mm, mobile phase: acetonitrile:methanol = 3:7, flow rate: 1.0 mL/min, 400C) (36.3 mg, >99% ee) and the title optically active compound with a retention time of 8.9 minutes resulting from the same analysis (49.4 mg, >99% ee). The property values of the title optically active compound with a retention time of 4.5 minutes are as follows. ESI-MS; m/z 450 [M* +H].
1 H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 2.00-2.20 (m, 3H), 2.29 (s, 3H), 2.35-2.38 (m, IH)5 4.16 (s, 3H), 4.31 (m, 2H), 4.54 (m, IH), 6.85-6.88 (m, 2H), 6.96 (m, IH), 7.48 (d, J = 15.6 Hz, IH), 7.69- 7.65 (m, 2H), 7.94 (s, IH), 8.45 (s, IH).
The property values of the title optically active compound with a retention time of 8.9 minutes are as follows. ESI-MS; m/z 450 [M+ +H]. ' H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 2.00-2.26 (m, 3H), 2.29 (s, 3H), 2.33-2.40 (m, IH), 4.16 (s, 3H), 4.30-4.32 (m, 2H), 4.54 (m, IH), 6.82-6.89 (m, 2H), 6.96 (m, IH), 7.48 (d, J = 15.6 Hz, IH), 7.59-7.65 (m, 2H), 7.94 (s, IH), 8.45 (s, IH). [0196]
The compounds of Examples 5 to 12 were obtained by the same method as in Examples 3 and 4 (Tables 1 and 2).
[0197]
Table 1
Figure imgf000071_0001
[0198]
Table 2
Figure imgf000072_0001
[0199]
Examples 13 and 14
Synthesis of (+) and (-)-8-(5-isopropyl-4-methoxy-2-methylphenylV2-[6-methoxy-5-(4-methyl- lH-imidazol-l-yπpyrazin-2-vn-5.6,7,8-tetrahvdroπ,2,41triazolo[l,5-a1pyridine [0200]
Figure imgf000073_0001
[0201]
A mixture of 2-bromo-8-(5-isopropyl-4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)-5,6,7,8- tetrahydro[l,2,4]triazolo[l,5-a]pyridine obtained in Reference Example 6 (120 mg), 3-methoxy- 2-(4-methyl-lH-imidazol-l-yl)-5-tributylstannylpyrazine obtained by Reference Example 3 (270 mg), palladium (II) acetate (14.8 mg), l,3-bis(diphenylphosphino)propane (54.3 mg), cuprous (I) oxide (94.2 mg) and l-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (4 ml) was heated with stirring at 1200C in a nitrogen atmosphere for two hours. The reaction mixture was brought back to room temperature, diluted with ethyl acetate and then filtered through celite. Water and brine were added to the filtrate, and the organic layer was separated. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (carrier: Chromatorex™ NH) to obtain the racemic title compound. The racemic title compound was separated by CHIRALPAK™ IC manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd. (2 cm x 25 cm; mobile phase: acetonitrile:methanol = 20:80, flow rate: 12 mL/min) to obtain the title optically active compound with a retention time of 9.8 minutes and positive optical rotation (13.9 mg, >99% ee) and the title optically active compound with a retention time of 10.8 minutes and negative optical rotation (12.7 mg, >99% ee).
The property values of the title optically active compound with positive optical rotation are as follows.
ESI-MS; 111^ 474 [M+ +H].
1 H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 1.06 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 3H), 1.10 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 3H), 1.95-2.03 (m, IH), 2.05-2.15 (m, IH), 2.20-2.38 (m, 2H), 2.30 (d, J = 0.8 Hz, 3H), 2.35 (s, 3H), 3.19 (qq, J = 6.8, 6.8 Hz, IH), 3.82 (s, 3H), 4.26 (s, 3H), 4.39-4.44 (m, 2H), 4.49 - 4.51 (m, IH), 6.58 (s, IH), 6.69 (s, IH), 7.64 (dd, J = 1.2, 0.8 Hz, IH), 8.49 (d, J = 1.2 Hz, IH), 8.73 (s, IH).
The property values of the title optically active compound with negative optical rotation coincided with those of the (+)-isomer. [0202] The compounds of Examples 15 to 18 were obtained by the same method as in Examples 13 and 14 (Table 3). [0203]
Table 3
Example No. Structural formula
Example 15
Example 16
Figure imgf000074_0001
Example 17
Example 18
[0204] Reference Example 1
Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-methoxy-2-(4-methyl-lH-imidazol-l-vπpyrazine [0205]
Figure imgf000074_0002
[0206]
Synthesis of N-(5 -bromo-3 -methoχypyrazin-2- vDformamide [0207]
Figure imgf000075_0001
[0208]
Acetic anhydride (150 ml) was added dropwise to formic acid (150 ml) under ice- cooling, followed by stirring at the same temperature for 25 minutes. A solution of 5-bromo-3- methoxypyrazin-2-ylamine (CAS #5900-13-0, 38.7 g) in THF (200 ml) was added dropwise to the reaction mixture over 10 minutes, and then the reaction solution was stirred at room temperature for one hour. Ice water was added to the reaction solution, and the precipitated powder was collected by filtration. The resulting powder was washed with water and then air- dried overnight to obtain 41.2 g of the title compound. The property values of the compound are as follows.
1 H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 4.06 (s, 3H), 7.87 (s, IH), 7.87 (brd, J = 11.0 Hz, IH), 9.37 (d, J =
11.0 Hz5 IH).
[0209]
Synthesis of N-(5-bromo-3-methoxypyrazin-2-yl)-N-(2-oxopropy0formamide [0210]
Figure imgf000075_0002
[0211]
Chloroacetone (21.2 ml) was added dropwise to a suspension heated to 500C of N-(5-bromo-3-methoxypyrazin-2-yl)formamide (41.2 g), cesium carbonate (92.7 g) and potassium iodide (3.09 g) in DMF (412 ml). Then, the reaction solution was stirred for 1.5 hours. The reaction solution was introduced into stirred ice water (3 L), and the precipitated powder was collected by filtration. The resulting powder was washed with water and then air- dried for three hours. Thereafter, 41.3 g of the title compound was obtained by drying under reduced pressure at room temperature. The property values of the compound are as follows. 1 H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 2.23 (s, 3H), 4.06 (s, 3H), 4.75 (s, 2H), 8.00 (s, IH), 9.18 (s, IH). [0212]
Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-methoxy-2-(4-methyl- 1 H-imidazol- 1 -vDpyrazine [0213]
°γNγBr
[0214]
A mixture of ammonium acetate (16.6 g), N-(5-bromo-3-methoxypyrazin-2-yl)- N-(2-oxopropyl)formamide (41.3 g), trifluoroacetic acid (16.6 ml) and toluene (268 ml) was heated under reflux for two hours while removing the moisture using a Dean-Stark apparatus. The reaction solution was brought back to room temperature. Ethyl acetate and ice water were added to the reaction solution, and the mixture was ice-cooled. Then, the reaction solution was made alkaline with concentrated aqueous ammonia, and then the organic layer was separated. The resulting organic layer was washed with brine and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, and the eluted fraction was concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was solidified with tert-butyl methyl ether, and the solid was collected by filtration. The solid was washed with ether tert- butyl methyl ether-heptane (2: 1) and air-dried to obtain 20.4 g of the title compound. The property values of the compound are as follows. ' H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 2.29 (d, J = 1.2 Hz, 3H), 4.15 (s, 3H), 7.55 (dd, J = 1.2, 1.2 Hz, IH), 8.09 (s, IH), 8.40 (d, J = 1.2 Hz, IH). [0215]
Reference Example 2 Synthesis of (E)-3-r6-methoxy-5-(4-methyl-lH-imidazol-l-yl)pyrazin-2-yllacrylohydrazide trihvdrochloride
[0216]
Figure imgf000077_0001
[0217]
Synthesis of t-butyl 2- {(E)-3-F6-methoxy-5-(4-methyl- 1 H-imidazol- 1 -vOpyrazin-2- vl]acrylovUhvdrazinecarboxylate [0218]
Figure imgf000077_0002
[0219]
A mixture of 5-bromo-3-methoxy-2-(4-methyl- 1 H-imidazol- 1 -yl)pyrazine obtained in Reference Example 1 (15 g), t-butyl 2-acryloylhydrazinecarboxylate (CAS #28689- 14-7, 11.5 g), tri-o-tolylphosphine (3.4 g), tris(dibenzylieneacetone)dipalladium (0) (5.14 g), IPEA (14.4 ml) and DMF (90.9 ml) was stirred at 1000C for two hours. The reaction solution was cooled to room temperature. Then, ethyl acetate (50 ml) and tert-butyl methyl ether (50 ml) were added to the reaction solution, followed by ice-cooling. The precipitated solid was collected by filtration. The resulting powder was washed with tert-butyl methyl ether-ethyl acetate (1:1) and then air-dried overnight to obtain 22.8 g of the title compound. The property values of the compound are as follows.
1 H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 1.51 (s, 9H), 2.30 (s, 3H), 4.17 (s, 3H), 6.96 (d, J = 15.2 Hz, IH),
7.62 (brs, IH), 7.67 (d, J = 15.2 Hz, IH), 8.03 (s, IH), 8.50 (brs, IH).
[0220]
Synthesis of (E)-3-[6-methoxy-5-(4-methyl-lH-imidazol-l-vπpyrazin-2-yl]acrylohvdrazide trihvdrochloride [0221]
Figure imgf000078_0001
[0222]
Concentrated hydrochloric acid (110 ml) was added to a suspension of t-butyl 2- { (E)-3 - [6-methoxy-5 -(4-methyl- 1 H-imidazol- 1 -yl)pyrazin-2-yl] acryloyl } hydrazinecarboxylate (22.8 g) in methanol (110 ml), followed by stirring at room temperature for 4.5 hours. The reaction solution was filtered through celite. The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with toluene and then concentrated under reduced pressure. Again, the residue was diluted with toluene and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with THF and then the precipitated solid was collected by filtration. The solid was washed with THF and then dried under reduced pressure at room temperature to obtain 16.1 g of the title compound. The property values of the compound are as follows. 1 H-NMR (CD3 OD) δ (ppm): 2.46 (d, J = 1.2 Hz, 3H), 4.28 (s, 3H), 7.27 (d, J = 15.2 Hz, IH), 7.84 (d, J = 15.2 Hz, IH), 8.17 (dd, J = 1.6, 1.2 Hz, IH), 8.38 (s, IH), 9.72 (d, J = 1.6 Hz, IH). [0223]
Reference Example 3
Synthesis of 3-methoxy-2-(4-methyl-lH-imidazol-l-vπ-5-tributylstannylpyrazine
[0224]
Figure imgf000078_0002
[0225] Amixture of 5-bromo-3-methoxy-2-(4-methyl-lH-imidazol-l-yl)pyrazine obtained in Reference Example 1 (500 mg), hexa-n-butylditin (1.48 ml), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)dipalladium (0) (215 mg) and xylene (20 ml) was heated under reflux for one hour. The reaction solution was cooled to room temperature and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography to obtain 270 mg of the title compound as an oil. The property values of the compound are as follows.
1 H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 0.90 - 0.94 (m, 9H), 1.31 - 1.56 (m, 12H), 1.62 - 1.66 (m, 6H), 2.30 (d, J = 0.8 Hz, 3H), 4.12 (s, 3H), 7.60 (dd, J = 1.2, 0.8 Hz, IH), 7.98 (s, IH), 8.45 (d, J = 1.2 Hz, IH). [0226]
Reference Example 4
Synthesis of ethyl 5-chloro-2-(4-fluoro-2-trifluoromethylphenyl)pentanimidate hydrochloride
Figure imgf000079_0001
[0228] Potassium tert-butoxide (9.58 g) was added to a solution of 4-fluoro-2-
(trifluoromethyl)phenylacetonitrile (15.08 g) in THF (400 mL) under ice-cooling in a nitrogen atmosphere, and the mixture was stirred at the same temperature for 20 minutes. l-Bromo-3- chloropropane (8.07 mL) was added to the reaction solution, followed by stirring for three hours. A saturated ammonium chloride solution was added to the reaction solution, followed by extraction with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate and then concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain crude 5-chloro-2-(4-fluoro-2- trifluoromethylphenyl)pentanenitrile.
A solution of the crude 5-chloro-2-(4-fluoro-2- trifluoromethylphenyl)pentanenitrile in ethanol (800 mL) was bubbled with hydrogen chloride gas under ice-cooling for one hour. Then, the reaction solution was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. A solution of the residue in ethanol (800 mL) was bubbled again with hydrogen chloride gas under ice-cooling for one hour. Then, the reaction solution was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. tert-Butyl methyl ether was added to the resulting residue. Trituration gave 13.4 g of the title compound. The property values of the compound are as follows. ESI-MS; m/z 326 [M+ +H].
1 H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 1.41 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.69-1.94 (m, 2H), 2.37 (m, IH), 2.58 (m, IH), 3.55-3.62 (m, 2H), 4.46 (dd, J = 7.2, 8.4 Hz, IH), 4.64 (q, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.38 (m, IH), 7.43 (dd, J = 2.8, 8.8 Hz, IH), 7.90 (dd, J = 4.8, 13.6 Hz, IH). [0229]
Reference Example 5
Synthesis of 8-(2,4-difluorophenvπ-2-vinyl-5.6.7.8-tetrahvdrori.2.4]triazoloπ.5-a]pyridine [0230]
Figure imgf000080_0001
[0231]
Synthesis of l-amino-3-(2,4-difluorophenyl)piperidin-2-one
[0232]
Figure imgf000080_0002
[0233]
Thionyl chloride (7 mL) was added dropwise to a solution of 2,4- difluorophenylacetic acid (4 g) in methanol (80 mL) under ice-cooling, and then the reaction solution was stirred at room temperature for two hours. The reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was allowed to pass through a short column to obtain a crude product of methyl (2,4-difluorophenyl)acetate.
Sodium hydride (containing 60% mineral oil, 976 mg) was added to a solution of the crude methyl (2,4-difluorophenyl)acetate in DMF (60 mL) under ice-cooling, followed by stirring at room temperature for 1.5 hours. The reaction solution was ice-cooled and 1 -chloro- 3-iodopropane (2.57 mL) was added dropwise. Then, the reaction solution was stirred at room temperature for three hours. A saturated ammonium chloride solution and ethyl acetate were added to the reaction solution, and the organic layer was separated. The resulting organic layer was sequentially washed with water and brine, dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was allowed to pass through a short column to obtain a crude product of methyl 5-chloro-2-(2,4-difluorophenyl)pentanoate.
Hydrazine monohydrate (11.3 mL) was added to a solution of the crude methyl 5- chloro-2-(2,4-difluorophenyl)pentanoate in ethanol (60 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 14 hours and then heated under reflux for 11 hours. The reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. Ethyl acetate and a saturated sodium bicarbonate solution were added to the resulting residue, and the organic layer was separated. The resulting organic layer was dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (carrier: Chromatorex™ NH) to obtain 2.97 g of the title compound. The property values of the compound are as follows. 1 H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 1.89-2.16 (m, 4H), 3.56-1.89-2.16 (m, 2H), 3.83 (m, IH), 4, 58 (brs, 2H)5 6.78-6.86 (m, 2H), 7.11 (m, IH). [0234]
Synthesis of N-[3-(2,4-difluorophenyl)-2-oxopiperidin- 1 -yl]-3-p-tolylsulfanylpropionamide [0235]
Figure imgf000081_0001
[0236]
EDC (3.77 g), HOBT (2.66 g) and IPEA (9.13 mL) were sequentially added to a solution of l-amino-3-(2,4-difluorophenyl)piperidine-2-one (2.97 g) and 3-[(4- methylphenyl)thio]propanoic acid (2.7 g) in DMF (90 mL), followed by stirring at room temperature for 27 hours. Ethyl acetate and water were added to the reaction solution, and the organic layer was separated. The resulting organic layer was dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered through a silica pad and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography to obtain 3.66 g of the title compound. The property values of the compound are as follows.
1 H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 1.96-2.03 (m, 3H), 2.14 (m, IH), 2.32 (s, 3H), 2.52 (m, 2H), 3.18 (m, 2H) 3.60-3.78 (m, 2H), 3.93 (m, IH), 6.77-6.87 (m, 2H), 7.11 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.22-7.30 (m, 4H), 7.84 (brs, IH). [0237]
Synthesis of 8-(2.4-difluorophenyπ-2-(2-p-tolylsulfanylethvπ-5.6.7.8-tetrahvdro- r 1.2.4]triazolo[l .5-a]pyridine [0238]
Figure imgf000082_0001
[0239]
Phosphorus oxychloride (75.6 mL) was added to N-[3-(2,4-difluorophenyl)-2- oxopiperidin-l-yl]-3-p-tolylsulfanylpropionamide (3.66 g), followed by stirring at 1200C for one hour. Then, the reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. Ammonium acetate (6.66 g) and acetic acid (90 mL) were sequentially added to the resulting residue, and the reaction mixture was stirred at 15O0C for 2.5 hours. The reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. Ethyl acetate and aqueous ammonia were added to the resulting residue, and the organic layer was separated. The resulting organic layer was dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (carrier: Chromatorex NH) to obtain 1.4 g of the title compound. The property values of the compound are as follows. ESI-MS; m/z 386 [M+ +H]. [0240] Synthesis of 8-(2,4-difluorophenyl)-2-vinyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro[l,2,4]triazolo[l,5-a]pyridine [0241]
Figure imgf000082_0002
[0242]
Sodium periodate (1.16 g) was added to a mixed solution of 8-(2,4- difiuorophenyl)-2-(2-p-tolylsulfanylethyl)-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro[l ,2,4]triazolo[l ,5-a]pyridine (1.4 g) in Methanol (135 mL) and water (67.4 mL), followed by stirring at room temperature for 19 hours. The reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. Then, ethyl acetate and water were added to the residue, and the organic layer was separated. The resulting organic layer was dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure. A solution of the resulting residue in toluene was heated under reflux for three days. The reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure, and the resulting residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography. Then, the resulting product was allowed to pass through an NH silica pad to obtain 744 mg of the title compound. The property values of the compound are as follows. ESI-MS; m/z 262 [M+ +H].
1 H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 1.96-2.19 (m, 3H), 2.32 (m, IH), 4.25 (m, 2H), 4.52 (dd, J = 6.0, 7.22 Hz, IH), 5.45 (dd, J = 1.6, 10.8 Hz, IH), 6.15 (dd, J = 1.6, 17.6 Hz, IH), 6.67 (dd, J = 10.8, 17.6 Hz, IH), 6.79-6.92 (m, 3H). [0243] Reference Example 6
Synthesis of 2-bromo-8-(5-isopropyl-4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)-5.6.7.8- tetrahvdro[l,2,41triazolofl,5-a]pyridine
[0244]
Figure imgf000083_0001
[0245] Synthesis of methyl (5-isopropyl-4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)acetate [0246]
Figure imgf000083_0002
[0247]
Thionyl chloride (3.5 ml) was added dropwise to a solution of (5-isopropyl-4- methoxy-2-methylphenyl)acetic acid (CAS No, 81354-65-6, 5.5 g) in methanol (50 ml) under ice-cooling. Then, the reaction solution was brought back to room temperature and stirred for two hours. The reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. A saturated sodium bicarbonate solution and tert-butyl methyl ether were added to the residue, and the organic layer was separated. The resulting organic layer was washed with brine and then dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The drying agent was separated by filtration, and then the organic layer was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography to obtain the title compound (5.0 g). The property values of the compound are as follows. ' H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 1.19 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.19 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H), 2.28 (s, 3H), 3.25 (qq, J = 7.2, 7.2 Hz, IH), 3.58 (s, 2H), 3.68 (s, 3H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 6.66 (s, IH), 7.00 (s, IH). [0248]
Synthesis of methyl 5-chloro-2-(5-isopropyl-4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)pentanoate [0249]
Figure imgf000084_0001
[0250]
A solution of methyl (5-isopropyl-4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)acetate (5 g) in anhydrous DMF (30 ml) was added to a suspension of 60% sodium hydride (928 mg) in anhydrous DMF (50 ml) at an internal temperature of 4 to 6°C in a nitrogen atmosphere, followed by stirring at the same temperature for five minutes. Then, l-chloro-3-iodopropane (4.5 ml) was added to the reaction solution at internal temperature of 4 to 6°C. Thereafter, the reaction solution was brought back to room temperature and stirred for four hours. Ethyl acetate was added to the reaction solution, followed by washing with water. The resulting organic layer was washed with brine and then dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The drying agent was separated by filtration, and then the organic layer was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography to obtain the title compound (7.7 g). The property values of the compound are as follows. 1 H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 1.17 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.19 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.64-1.97 (m, 3H), 2.14-2.25 (m, IH), 2.35 (s, 3H), 3.24 (qq, J = 7.2, 7.2 Hz, IH), 3.48-3.56 (m, 2H), 3.64 (s, 3H), 3.77 (t, 7.6 Hz, IH), 3.08 (s, 3H), 6.64 (s, IH), 7.08 (s, IH). [0251]
Synthesis of tert-butyl N'-[5-chloro-2-(5-isopropyl-4-methoxy-2- methylphenvDpentanoyπhvdrazinecarboxvlate [0252]
Figure imgf000085_0001
[0253]
A 5 N sodium hydroxide solution (22 ml) was added to a mixed solution of methyl 5-chloro-2-(5-isopropyl-4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)pentanoate (7.7 g) in methanol (25 ml)-THF (25 ml), followed by stirring at room temperature for four hours. The reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. Water was added to the residue, followed by washing with heptane. The aqueous layer was made acidic with 5 N hydrochloric acid, followed by extraction with tert-butyl methyl ether. The resulting organic layer was washed with brine and then dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The drying agent was separated by filtration and the organic layer was concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain 5-chloro-2-(5- isopropyl-4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)pentanoic acid (6.2 g).
BOPCl (7.9 g) was added to a solution of 5-chloro-2-(5-isopropyl-4-methoxy-2- methylphenyl)pentanoic acid (6.2 g), tert-butyl carbazate (4.1 g) and IPEA (10.8 ml) in dichloromethane (120 ml) under ice-cooling. Then, the reaction solution was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. A sodium bicarbonate solution and tert-butyl methyl ether were added to the residue, and the organic layer was separated. The resulting organic layer was washed with brine and then dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The drying agent was separated by filtration, and then the organic layer was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography to obtain the title compound (6.1 g). The property values of the compound are as follows. ESI-MS; m/z 435 [M+ +Na]. [0254] Synthesis of 5-chloro-2-(5-isopropyl-4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)pentanoic acid hvdrazide [0255]
Figure imgf000086_0001
[0256]
A 4 N hydrogen chloride-ethyl acetate solution (50 ml) was added to a solution of tert-butyl N'-[5-chloro-2-(5-isopropyl-4-methoxy-2- methylphenyl)pentanoyl]hydrazinecarboxylate (6.1 g) was dissolved in ethyl acetate (50 ml), followed by stirring at room temperature for 3.5 hours. The reaction solution was made alkaline with a 5 N sodium hydroxide solution under ice-cooling, and the organic layer was separated. The resulting organic layer was washed with brine and then dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The drying agent was separated by filtration, and then the organic layer was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography to obtain the title compound (4.4 g). The property values of the compound are as follows.
ESI-MS; m/z 313 [M+ +H].
1 H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 1.186 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 3H), 1.190 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.61-1.85 (m, 2H), 1.93-2.04 (m, IH), 2.26-2.88 (m, IH), 2.27 (s, 3H), 3.25 (qq, J = 7.2, 6.8 Hz, IH), 3.48-3.59
(m, 3H), 3.75-3.89 (m, 5H), 6.49 (br s, IH), 6.65 (s, IH), 7.08 (s, IH).
[0257]
Synthesis of 8-(5-isopropyl-4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)-5.6.7.8-tetrahvdro[1.2,41triazolo[l,5- a]pyridin-2-ylamine [0258]
Figure imgf000086_0002
[0259] p-Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (4 g) was added to a solution of 5-chloro-2- (5-isopropyl-4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)pentanoic acid hydrazide (4.4 g) and cyanamide (3.6 g) in ethanol (150 ml), and the mixture was heated under reflux at 800C for two hours. After cooling to room temperature, TEA (9.8 ml) was added to the reaction solution, and the mixture was further heated under reflux at 800C for three days. The reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. A sodium bicarbonate solution and ethyl acetate were added to the residue, and the organic layer was separated. The resulting organic layer was washed with brine and then dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The drying agent was separated by filtration, and then the organic layer was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography to obtain the title compound (2.4 g). The property values of the compound are as follows. ESI-MS; m/z 301 [M+ +H].
1 H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 1.12 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 3H), 1.14 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 3H), 1.86-2.26 (m, 4H), 2.27 (s, 3H), 3.19 (qq, J = 6.8, 6.8 Hz IH), 3.79 (s, 3H), 4.02 (br s, 2H), 4.06-4.12 (m, 2H), 4.19-4.24 (m, IH), 6.64 (s, IH), 6.69 (s, IH). [0260]
Synthesis of 2-bromo-8-(5-isopropyl-4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl>5.6.7.8- tetrahvdrofl .2,4]triazolori .5-a]pyridine
[0261]
Figure imgf000087_0001
[0262] Isoamyl nitrite (1 mL) was added to a solution of 8-(5-isopropyl-4-methoxy-2- methylphenyl)-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro[l,2,4]triazolo[l,5-a]pyridin-2-ylamine (1.5 g) and copper (II) bromide (1.7 g) in acetonitrile (50 mL), and the mixture was heated with stirring at 7O0C for 45 minutes. Ethyl acetate was added to the reaction solution, followed by washing with aqueous ammonia. The resulting organic layer was washed with brine and then dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The drying agent was separated by filtration, and then the organic layer was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography to obtain the title compound (1.4 g). The property values of the compound are as follows. ESI-MS; m/z 364 [M+ +H].
1 H-NMR (CDCl3 ) δ (ppm): 1.11 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.12 (d, J = 7.2 Hz5 3H), 1.90-2.30 (m, 4H), 2.26 (s, 3H), 3.19 (qq, J = 7.2, 7.2 Hz, IH), 3.80 (s, 3H), 4.24-4.29 (m, 2H), 4.30-4.36 (m, IH), 6.59 (s, IH), 6.65 (s, IH). [0263]
Test Example 1
Quantification of Aβ peptide in culture of neurons from rat fetus brain
The present inventors performed the following tests in order to exhibit utility of the compound of the general formula (I) according to the present invention. [0264]
(1) Rat primary neuronal culture
Primary neuronal cultures were prepared from the cerebral cortex of embryonic day 18 Wistar rats (Charles River Japan, Yokohama, Japan). Specifically, the embryos were aseptically removed from pregnant rats under ether anesthesia. The brain was isolated from the embryo and immersed in an ice-cold L- 15 medium (Invitrogen Corp. Cat #11415-064, Carlsbad, CA, USA, or SIGMA L 1518, for example). The cerebral cortex was collected from the isolated brain under a stereoscopic microscope. The cerebral cortex fragments collected were enzymatically treated in an enzyme solution containing 0.25% trypsin (Invitrogen Corp. Cat #15050-065, Carlsbad, CA, USA) and 0.01% DNase (Sigma D5025, St. Louis, MO, USA) at 37°C for 30 minutes to disperse the cells. Here, the enzymatic reaction was stopped by adding inactivated horse serum to the solution. The enzymatically treated solution was centrifuged at 1 ,500 rpm for five minutes to remove the supernatant. 5 to 10 ml of a medium was added to the resulting cell mass. Neurobasal medium (Invitrogen Corp. Cat #21103-049, Carlsbad, CA, USA) supplemented with 2% B27 supplement (Invitrogen Corp. Cat #17504-044, Carlsbad, CA, USA), 25 μM 2-mercaptoethanol (2-ME, WAKO Cat #139-06861, Osaka, Japan), 0.5 mM L- glutamine (Invitrogen Corp. Cat #25030-081, Carlsbad, CA, USA), and Antibiotics- Antimycotics (Invitrogen Corp. Cat #15240-062, Carlsbad, CA, USA) was used as the medium (Neurobasal/B27/2-ME). However, the above Neurobasal medium not supplemented with 2- ME (Neurobasal/B27) was used for the assay. The cells were redispersed by mild pipetting of the cell mass to which the medium was added. The cell dispersion was filtered through a 40- μm nylon mesh (Cell Strainer, Cat #35-2340, Becton Dickinson Labware, Franklin Lakes, NJ, USA) to remove the remaining cell mass, and thus a neuronal cell suspension was obtained. The neuronal cell suspension was diluted with the medium and then plated in a volume of 100 μl/well at an initial cell density of 5 x 105 cells/cm2 in a 96- well polystyrene culture plate pre- coated with poly-L or D-lysine (Falcon Cat #35-3075, Becton Dickinson Labware, Franklin Lakes, NJ, USA coated with poly-L-lysine using the method shown below, or BIOCO AT™ cell environments Poly-D-lysine cell ware 96- well plate, Cat #35-6461, Becton Dickinson Labware, Franklin Lakes, NJ, USA). Poly-L-lysine coating was carried out as follows. 100 μg/ml of a poly-L-lysine (SIGMA P2636, St. Louis, MO, USA) solution was aseptically prepared with a 0.15 M borate buffer (pH 8.5). 100 μg/well of the solution was added to the 96-well polystyrene culture plate and incubated at room temperature for one or more hours or at 40C overnight or longer. Thereafter, the coated 96-well polystyrene culture plate was washed with sterile water four or more times, and then dried or rinsed with sterile PBS or medium, and used for cell plating. The plated cells were cultured in the culture plate at 37°C in 5% CO2-95% air for one day. Then, the total amount of the medium was replaced with a fresh Neurobasal/B27/2-ME medium, and then the cells were cultured for further three days. [0265] Addition of compounds The drug was added to the culture plate on Day 4 of culture as follows. The total amount of the medium was removed from the wells, and 180 μl/well of Neurobasal medium not containing 2-ME and containing 2% B-27 (Neurobasal/B27) was added thereto. A solution of the test compound in dimethyl sulfoxide (hereinafter abbreviated as DMSO) was diluted with Neurobasal/B27 to a concentration 10-fold higher than the final concentration. 20 μl/well of the dilution was added to and sufficiently mixed with the medium. The final DMSO concentration was 1% or less. Only DMSO was added to the control group. [0266] Sampling
The cells were cultured for three days after addition of the compound, and the total amount of the medium was collected. The resulting medium was used as an ELISA sample. [0267] Evaluation of cell survival
Cell survival was evaluated by an MTT assay according to the following procedure. After collecting the medium, 100 μl/well of a pre- warmed medium was added to the wells. Further, 8 μl/well of a solution of 8 mg/ml of MTT (SIGMA M2128, St. Louis, MO, USA) in D-PBS(-) (Dulbecco's phosphate buffered Saline, SIGMA D8537, St. Louis, MO, USA) was added to the wells. The 96-well polystyrene culture plate was incubated in an incubator at 370C in 5% CO2 -95% air for 20 minutes. 100 μl/well of an MTT lysis buffer was added thereto, and MTT formazan crystals were sufficiently dissolved in the buffer in the incubator at 37°C in 5% CO2 -95% air. Then, the absorbance at 550 nm in each well was measured. The MTT lysis buffer was prepared as follows. 100 g of SDS (sodium dodecyl sulfate (sodium lauryl sulfate), WAKO 191-07145, Osaka, Japan) was dissolved in a mixed solution of 250 mL of N,N-dimethylformamide (WAKO 045-02916, Osaka, Japan) with 250 mL of distilled water. 350 μl each of concentrated hydrochloric acid and acetic acid were further added to the solution to allow the solution to have a final pH of about 4.7.
Upon measurement, wells having no cells plated and containing only the medium and MTT solution were set as background (bkg). The measured values were respectively applied to the following formula including subtracting bkg values from them. Thus, the proportion against the control group (group not treated with the drug, CTRL) (% of CTRL) was calculated to compare and evaluate cell survival activities.
% of CTRL = ((A55O_sample - A550_bkg)/(A550_CTRL - bkg)) x 100 (A550_sample: absorbance at 550 nm of sample well, A550_bkg: absorbance at 550 nm of background well, A550 CTRL: absorbance at 550 nm of control group well) [0268] Aβ ELISA
For Aβ ELISA, Human/Rat β Amyloid (42) ELISA Kit Wako (#290-62601) from Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd. or Human Amyloid beta ( 1 -42) Assay Kit (#27711 ) from IBL Co., Ltd. was used. Aβ ELISA was carried out according to the protocols recommended by the manufacturers (methods described in the attached documents). However, the Aβ calibration curve was created using beta-amyloid peptide 1-42, rat (Calbiochem, #171596 [Aβ42]). The results are shown in Table 1 as percentage to the Aβ concentration in the medium of the control group (% of CTRL). [0269]
From the results of Aβ concentrations, the concentration of each compound that decreases Aβ concentration by 50% of control (IC50) was calculated. Those data are shown in Table 4. [0270]
Table 4
Figure imgf000091_0001
[0271]
As is clear from the results of Table 4, the compound of the present invention was proved to have an Aβ42 production reducing effect. [0272]
Accordingly, the compound of the general formula (I) or pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof according to the present invention have an Aβ42 production reducing effect. Thus, the present invention can particularly provide a therapeutic agent for a neurodegenerative disease caused by Aβ such as Alzheimer's disease or Down's syndrome.
INDUSTRIALAPPLICABILITY [0273]
The compound of the general formula (I) according to the present invention has an Aβ production reducing effect, and thus is particularly useful as a therapeutic agent for a neurodegenerative disease caused by Aβ such as Alzheimer's disease or Down's syndrome.

Claims

1. A compound represented by the formula [I] :
Figure imgf000092_0001
or a pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof, wherein R1 and R2 are the same or different and each represent a substituent selected from the following Substituent Group al ; m represents an integer of 0 to 3; n represents an integer of 0 to 2; X1 represents i) a single bond, ii)
— C≡C— or iii) -CRs=CR4- (wherein R3 and R4 are the same or different and each represent
(1) a hydrogen atom, (2) a Cl-6 alkyl group or (3) a halogen atom);
X2 represents i) a single bond, ii) a Cl-6 alkylene group or iii) -X3- (wherein X3 represents -NR5-, -O-, -C(O)-, -S-, -S(O)- or -S(O)2- and R5 represents a hydrogen atom, a Cl-6 alkyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C2-6 alkanoyl group or a Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group);
Ring A represents i) a five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group or ii) a five- membered aromatic heterocyclic group fused with a 5- to 14-membered non-aromatic ring group, which contains two or more nitrogen atoms and may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the following Substituent Group bl (wherein the non-aromatic ring group may have a crosslinked structure or a spiro ring system); and
Ring B represents a monocyclic or fused cyclic aromatic ring group selected from the group consisting of the formulas [2] to [19]:
Figure imgf000093_0001
each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the following Substituent Group cl,
Substituent Group al: a Cl-6 alkyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C2-6 alkenyl group, a Cl-6 alkoxy group, a C2-6 alkenyloxy group, a C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group, an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group or Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 Cl-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), a cyano group, a formyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group and a nitro group;
Substituent Group bl : a Cl-6 alkyl group (wherein the alkyl group may be substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms), a C2-6 alkenyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C6-14 aryl group, a C6-14 aryl-Cl-6 alkyl group, a Cl-6 alkoxy group, a C2-6 alkenyloxy group, a C3- 8 cycloalkyloxy group, a C2-6 alkanoyl group, a C4-9 cycloalkylcarbonyl group, a C7-15 aroyl group, a Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group, a C2-6 alkenylsulfonyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group, a C6-14 arylsulfonyl group, a Cl-6 alkylthio group, a C2-6 alkenylthio group, a C3-8 cycloalkylthio group, an aminosulfonyl group (wherein the aminosulfonyl group may have 1 to 2 Cl-6 alkyl groups, C2-6 alkenyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group, Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group or C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 Cl-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), a cyano group, a formyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, an oxo group, a 1-pyrrolidinyl group, a 1-piperidinyl group, a 1-homopiperidinyl group, an indolin-1-yl group, a 1,2,3,4- tetrahydroquinolin-1-yl group and a 4-morpholinyl group;
Substituent Group cl : i) an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group, Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group or C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 Cl-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), ii) a cyano group, iii) a halogen atom, iv) a hydroxyl group and v) v)-i) a Cl-6 alkyl group, v)-ii) a C2-6 alkenyl group, v)-iii) a C2-6 alkynyl group, v)-iv) a Cl-6 alkoxy group, v)-v) a Cl-6 alkylthio group, v)-vi) a Cl-6 alkylaminocarbonyl group, v)-vii) a Cl -6 alkylsulfonyl group, v)-viii) a Cl -6 alkylaminosulfonyl group, v)-ix) a C2- 6 alkanoyl group, v)-x) a phenyl group, v)-xi) a pyridyl group, v)-xii) a pyridazinyl group, v)- xiii) a pyrimidinyl group, v)-xiv) a 1-pyrrolidinyl group, v)-xv) a 1-piperidinyl group, v)-xvi) a 1-homopiperidinyl group and v)-xvii) a 4-morpholinyl group, each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of a C 1-6 alkyl group and a halogen atom.
2. The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to claim 1, wherein Ring A is a five-membered aromatic heterocyclic group selected from the group consisting of the formulas [20] to [26]:
Figure imgf000094_0001
20 21 22 23
Figure imgf000094_0002
24 25 ' 26
wherein • represents a bonding site to the formula [27]:
Figure imgf000094_0003
A» represents a bonding site to X2, or any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [28] to [39]:
Figure imgf000095_0001
wherein • and A» are as defined above and the partial structure:
represents a single bond or a double bond, each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from Substituent Group bl. 3. The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to claim 2, wherein Ring A is any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [21], [28], [29], [31], [32] and [34] to [37]:
Figure imgf000095_0002
wherein •, A» and the partial structure:
are as defined above.
4. The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to claim 2, wherein Ring A is any one ring selected from the group consisting of the formulas [21], [28-1], [29-1], [31-1], [32-1] and [34-1] to [37-1]:
Figure imgf000096_0001
' ' ' -1 '
Figure imgf000096_0002
wherein •, A» and the partial structure:
are as defined above.
5. The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to claim 2, wherein Ring A is a ring of the formula [28-1]:
Figure imgf000096_0003
28-1 wherein •, A* and the partial structure:
are as defined above.
6. The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to claim 1, wherein Ring B is a phenyl group, a pyridyl group, an oxazolyl group, an imidazolyl group, an thiazolyl group, a dihydrobenzofuranyl group or a thienyl group.
7. The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to claim 1, wherein Xi is i) a single bond or ii) -CRa=CR4-.
8. The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to claim 1, wherein Xi is a single bond.
9. The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to claim 1, wherein Xi is -CR3=CR4-.
10. The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to claim 1, wherein X2 is i) a single bond or ii) a C 1-6 alkylene group.
11. The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to claim 1, wherein X2 is a single bond.
12. The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to claim 1, wherein R1 is a C 1-6 alkyl group or a halogen atom and m is 1 to 2.
13. The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to claim 1, wherein R2 is a Cl -6 alkoxy group and n is 1.
14. The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to claim 9, wherein R3 and R4 are the same or different and are each (1) a hydrogen atom or (2) a halogen atom.
15. The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to claim 9, wherein R3 and R4 are each a hydrogen atom.
16. The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to claim 1, wherein the substituent for Ring A is a substituent selected from the group consisting of: a C 1-6 alkyl group (wherein the alkyl group may be substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms), a C3-8 cycloalkyl group, a C6-14 aryl group, a C6-14 aryl-Cl-6 alkyl group, a Cl-6 alkoxy group, a C3-8 cycloalkyloxy group, a C2-6 alkanoyl group, a C7-15 aroyl group, a Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group, a C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group, a C6-14 arylsulfonyl group, a cyano group, a formyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group and an oxo group.
17. The compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to claim 1, wherein the substituent for Ring B is a substituent selected from the group consisting of: i) an amino group (wherein the amino group may have one C2-6 alkanoyl group, Cl-6 alkylsulfonyl group or C3-8 cycloalkylsulfonyl group or 1 to 2 Cl-6 alkyl groups or C3-8 cycloalkyl groups), ii) a cyano group, Ui) a halogen atom, iv) a hydroxyl group and v) v)-i) a Cl- 6 alkyl group, v)-ii) a Cl-6 alkoxy group, v)-iii) a Cl-6 alkylthio group and v)-iv) a phenyl group, each of which may have 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of a Cl-6 alkyl group and a halogen atom.
18. One compound selected from the group consisting of the formulas [A-I] to [A-7]:
Figure imgf000098_0001
or a pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof.
19. A medicine comprising the compound or pharmacologically acceptable salt or ester thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 18 as an active ingredient.
20. The medicine according to claim 19 for the treatment of a disease selected from Alzheimer's disease, dementia, Down's syndrome and amyloidosis.
PCT/JP2010/053378 2009-02-26 2010-02-24 Imidazolylpyrazine derivatives Ceased WO2010098495A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US15565709P 2009-02-26 2009-02-26
JP2009-043300 2009-02-26
JP2009043300A JP2012051806A (en) 2009-02-26 2009-02-26 Imidazolylpyrazine derivative
US61/155,657 2009-02-26

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2010098495A1 true WO2010098495A1 (en) 2010-09-02

Family

ID=42184107

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2010/053378 Ceased WO2010098495A1 (en) 2009-02-26 2010-02-24 Imidazolylpyrazine derivatives

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2012051806A (en)
AR (1) AR075605A1 (en)
TW (1) TW201031662A (en)
WO (1) WO2010098495A1 (en)

Cited By (32)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2011086098A1 (en) 2010-01-15 2011-07-21 Ortho-Mcneil-Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc Novel substituted bicyclic triazole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
WO2012029991A1 (en) * 2010-09-02 2012-03-08 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Fused triazoles for the treatment or prophylaxis of mild cognitive impairment
WO2012126984A1 (en) 2011-03-24 2012-09-27 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Novel substituted triazolyl piperazine and triazolyl piperidine derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
WO2013010904A1 (en) 2011-07-15 2013-01-24 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Novel substituted indole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
US8546440B2 (en) 2008-12-18 2013-10-01 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted bicyclic imidazole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
EP2687528A1 (en) * 2012-07-17 2014-01-22 Ares Trading S.A. Fused triazole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
US8697673B2 (en) 2011-03-31 2014-04-15 Pfizer Inc. Bicyclic pyridinones
US8703954B2 (en) 2009-02-26 2014-04-22 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Salt of tetrahydrotriazolopyridine derivative and crystal thereof
US8754100B2 (en) 2009-02-26 2014-06-17 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Nitrogen-containing fused heterocyclic compounds and their use as beta amyloid production inhibitors
US8772504B2 (en) 2009-02-19 2014-07-08 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted benzoxazole, benzimidazole, oxazolopyridine and imidazopyridine derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
US8835482B2 (en) 2009-05-07 2014-09-16 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted indazole and aza-indazole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
US8884017B2 (en) 2001-12-27 2014-11-11 Bayer Intellectual Property Gmbh 2-heteroarylcarboxylic acid amides
US8916564B2 (en) 2012-09-21 2014-12-23 Pfizer Inc. Substituted pyrido[1,2-a]pyrazines for the treatment of neurodegenerative and neurological disorders
US8946266B2 (en) 2009-07-15 2015-02-03 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted triazole and imidazole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
US8946426B2 (en) 2009-02-06 2015-02-03 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted bicyclic heterocyclic compounds as gamma secretase modulators
US9108961B2 (en) 2010-05-17 2015-08-18 Forum Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Crystalline form of (R)-7-chloro-N-(quinuclidin-3-yl)benzo[b]thiophene-2-carboxamide hydrochloride
US9150591B2 (en) 2010-08-10 2015-10-06 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Heterocyclic compound and use thereof
US9181245B2 (en) 2012-05-16 2015-11-10 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted pyrido[1,2-a]pyrazines and substituted pyrido[1,2-a][1,4]diazepines for the treatment of (inter alia) Alzheimer's disease
US9453000B2 (en) 2007-08-31 2016-09-27 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Polycyclic compound
US9585877B2 (en) 2012-05-08 2017-03-07 Forum Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of maintaining, treating or improving cognitive function
CN107118173A (en) * 2017-07-12 2017-09-01 阿里化学(常州)有限公司 A kind of cycloheptatriene Bing oxazine compounds and preparation method thereof
US9765073B2 (en) 2015-02-03 2017-09-19 Pfizer Inc. Cyclopropabenzofuranyl pyridopyrazinediones
US10112943B2 (en) 2012-12-20 2018-10-30 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Substituted imidazoles as gamma secretase modulators
US10246454B2 (en) 2013-01-17 2019-04-02 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Substituted 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[1,2-a]pyrazine-1,6-diones as gamma secretase modulators
US10562897B2 (en) 2014-01-16 2020-02-18 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Substituted 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[1,2-a]pyrazine-1,6-diones as gamma secretase modulators
US11426412B2 (en) 2017-10-18 2022-08-30 Jubilant Epipad LLC Imidazo-pyridine compounds as PAD inhibitors
US11459338B2 (en) 2017-11-24 2022-10-04 Jubilant Episcribe Llc Heterocyclic compounds as PRMT5 inhibitors
US11529341B2 (en) 2018-03-13 2022-12-20 Jubilant Prodel LLC Bicyclic compounds as inhibitors of PD1/PD-L1 interaction/activation
US11629135B2 (en) 2017-11-06 2023-04-18 Jubilant Prodell Llc Pyrimidine derivatives as inhibitors of PD1/PD-L1 activation
US11673892B2 (en) 2017-10-11 2023-06-13 Genentech, Inc. Bicyclic compounds for use as RIP1 kinase inhibitors
US11833156B2 (en) 2017-09-22 2023-12-05 Jubilant Epipad LLC Heterocyclic compounds as pad inhibitors
US12370192B2 (en) 2019-09-16 2025-07-29 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Azole-fused pyridazin-3(2H)-one derivatives

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111205345A (en) * 2020-01-19 2020-05-29 四川澄华生物科技有限公司 Preparation method of obeticholic acid

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2004110350A2 (en) 2003-05-14 2004-12-23 Torreypines Therapeutics, Inc. Compouds and uses thereof in modulating amyloid beta
WO2007110258A1 (en) 2006-03-24 2007-10-04 Robert Bosch Gmbh Ammonia sensor
WO2007139149A1 (en) 2006-05-31 2007-12-06 Eisai R & D Management Co., Ltd. Compound for biological reagent

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2004110350A2 (en) 2003-05-14 2004-12-23 Torreypines Therapeutics, Inc. Compouds and uses thereof in modulating amyloid beta
WO2007110258A1 (en) 2006-03-24 2007-10-04 Robert Bosch Gmbh Ammonia sensor
WO2007139149A1 (en) 2006-05-31 2007-12-06 Eisai R & D Management Co., Ltd. Compound for biological reagent

Non-Patent Citations (98)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Jikken Kagaku Koza", vol. 22, THE CHEMICAL SOCIETY OF JAPAN
"Kagaku Koza", vol. 19, THE CHEMICAL SOCIETY OF JAPAN
"The Chemistry of Heterocyclic Compounds. Imidazole and Derivatives", vol. I, 1953, INTERS. PUBLISH., pages: 33
"Yuki Gosei", November 1992, MARUZEN CO., LTD., pages: 12 - 13
"Yuki Gosei", November 1992, MARUZEN CO., LTD., pages: 137 - 144
"Yuki Gosei", November 1992, MARUZEN CO., LTD., pages: 450 - 453
"Yuki Gosel", November 1992, MARUZEN CO., LTD., pages: 137 - 144
"Yuld Gosei", November 1992, MARUZEN CO., LTD., pages: 137 - 144
A. SUZUKI, CHEM. REV., vol. 95, 1995, pages 2457
ASSINI A: "Plasma levels of amyloid ?-protein 42 are increased in women with mild cognitive impariment", NEUROLOGY, vol. 63, no. 5, 14 September 2004 (2004-09-14), pages 828 - 831
ATWOOD CS: "Cerebrovascular requirement for sealant, anti-coagulant and remodeling molecules that allow for the maintenance of vascular integrity and blood supply", BRAIN RESEARCH REVIEWS, vol. 43, no. 1, September 2003 (2003-09-01), pages 164 - 78
BARELLI H: "Characterization of new polyclonal antibodies specific for 40 and 42 amino acid-long amyloid ? peptides: their use to examine the cell biology of presenilins and the immunohistochemistry of sporadic Alzheimer's disease and cerebral amyloid angiopathy cases", MOLECULAR MEDICINE, no. 10, 3 October 1997 (1997-10-03), pages 695 - 707
BARRACHINA M: "Amyloid-? deposition in the cerebral cortex in Dementia with Lewy bodies is accompanied by a relative increase in A?PP mRNA isoforms containing the Kunitz protease inhibitor", NEUROCHEMISTRY INTERNATIONAL, vol. 46, no. 3, February 2005 (2005-02-01), pages 253 - 260
BEST JD: "In vivo characterization of A? (40) changes in brain and cerebrospinal fluid using the novel y-secretase inhibitor N-[cis-4-[(4-chlorophenyl)sulfonyl]-4-(2,5-difluorophenyl)cyclohexyl]-1,1,1-trifluoromethanesulphonlamide (MK-560) in the rat", THE JOURNAL OF PHARMACOLOGY AND EXPERIMANTAL THERAPEUTICS, vol. 7, no. 2, 31 May 2006 (2006-05-31), pages 786 - 790
BEST JD: "The novel y-secretase inhibitor N-[cis-4-[(4-chlorophenyl)sulfonyl]-4-(2,5-difluorophenyl)cyclohexyl]-1,1,1-trifluoromethanesulphonlamide (MK-560) reduces amylid plaque deposition without evidence notch-related pathology in the Tg2576 mouse", THE JOURNAL OF PHARMACOLOGY AND EXPERIMANTAL THERAPEUTICS, vol. 20, no. 2, 3 February 2007 (2007-02-03), pages 552 - 558
BLASS JP: "Brain metabolism and brain disease: Is metabolic deficiency the proximate cause of Alzheimer dementia?", JOURNAL OF NEUROSCIENCE RESEARCH, vol. 66, no. 5, 1 December 2001 (2001-12-01), pages 851 - 856
CALHOUN ME: "Neuronal overexpression of mutant amyloid precursor protein results in prominent deposition of cerebrovascular amyloid", PROCEEDING NATIONAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCE USA, vol. 96, no. 24, 23 November 1999 (1999-11-23), pages 14088 - 14093
CRAS P: "Presenile Alzheimer dementia characterized by amyloid angiopathy and large amyloid core type senile plaques in the APP 692A1a -> Gly mutation", ACTA NEUROPATHOLOGICA (BERL), vol. 96, no. 3, September 1998 (1998-09-01), pages 253 - 260
CROOK R: "A variant of Alzheimer's disease with spastic pararesis and unusual plaques due to deletion ofexon 9 of presenilin 1", NATURE MEDICINE, vol. 4, no. 4, April 1998 (1998-04-01), pages 452 - 455
D.D. DAVEY, J. MED. CHEM., vol. 34, 1991, pages 2671 - 2677
DE MEYER GR: "Platelet phagocytosis and processing of ?-amyloid precursor protein as a mechanism of macrophage activation in atherosclerosis", CIRCULATION RESERACH, vol. 90, no. 11, 14 June 2002 (2002-06-14), pages 1197 - 1204
DERMAUT B: "Cerebral amyloid angiopathy is a pathogenic lesion in Alzheimer's Disease due to a novel presenilin-1 mutation", BRAIN, vol. 124, no. 12, 2001, pages 2383 - 2392
EVERT BO: "Inflammatory genes are upreglulated in expanded. ataxin-3-expressing cell lines and spinocerebellar ataxia type 3 brains", THE JOURNAL OF NEUROSCIENCE, vol. 21, no. 15, 1 August 2001 (2001-08-01), pages 5389 - 5396
EVIN G: "Alternative transcripts of presenilin-1 associated with frontotemporal dementia", NEUROREPORT, vol. 13, no. 5, 16 April 2002 (2002-04-16), pages 719 - 723
FORMAN MS: "Differential effects of the Swedish mutant amyloid precursor protein on ?- amyloid accumulation and secretion in neurons and nonneuronal cells", THE JOURNAL OF BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY, vol. 272, no. 51, 19 December 1997 (1997-12-19), pages 32247 - 32253
FORMAN MS: "Differential effects of the swedish mutant amyloid precursor protein on p-amyloid accumulation and secretion in neurons and nonneuronal cells", THE JOURNAL OF BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY, vol. 272, no. 51, 19 December 1997 (1997-12-19), pages 32247 - 32253
GATTAZ WF: "Platelet phospholipase A2 activity in Alzheimer's disease and mild cognitive impairment", JOURNAL OF NEURAL TRANSMISSION, vol. 111, no. 5, May 2004 (2004-05-01), pages 591 - 601
GEHNNANN J: "Amyloid precursor protein (APP) expression in multiple sclerosis lesions", GLIA, vol. 15, no. 2, October 1995 (1995-10-01), pages 141 - 51
GIASSON BI: "Interactions of amyloidogenic proteins", NEUROMOLECULAR MEDICINE, vol. 4, no. 1-2, 2003, pages 49 - 58
GITTER BD: "Stereoselective inhibition of amyloid beta peptide secretion by LY450139, a novel functional gamma secretase inhibitor", NEUROLOGY OF AGING, vol. 25, no. 2, 2004, pages 571
GLEANER GG: "Alzheimer's disease; initial report of the purification and characterization of a novel cerebrovascular amyloid protein", BIOCHEMICAL AND BIOPHYSICAL RESEARCH COMMUNICATIONS, vol. 120, no. 3, 16 May 1984 (1984-05-16), pages 885 - 890
GLENNER GG: "Alzheimer's disease: initial report of the purification and characterization of a novel cerebrovascular amyloid protein", BIOCHEMICAL AND BIOPHYSICAL RESEARCH COMMUNICATIONS, vol. 120, no. 3, 16 May 1984 (1984-05-16), pages 885 - 890
GOURAS GK: "Intraneuronal A?42 accumulation in human brain", AMERICAN JOURNAL OF PATHOLOGY, vol. 156, no. 1, January 2000 (2000-01-01), pages 15 - 20
GOURAS GK: "Intraneuronal A?42 accumulation in human brain", AMERICAN JOURNAL OF PATHOLOGY, vol. 6, no. 1, 15 January 2000 (2000-01-15), pages 15 - 20
HAMILTON RL: "Alzheimer disease pathology in .amyotrophic lateral sclerosis", ACTA NEUROPATHOLOGICA, vol. 107, no. 6, June 2004 (2004-06-01), pages 515 - 522
HAYASHI Y: "Evidence for. presenilin-1 involvement in amyloid angiopathy in the Alzheimer's disease-affected brain", BRAIN RESEARCH, vol. 789, no. 2, 13 April 1998 (1998-04-13), pages 307 - 314
HERZIG MC: "A? is targeted to the vasculature in a mouse model of hereditary cerebral hemorrhage with amyloidosis", NATURE NEUROSCIENCE, vol. 7, no. 9, September 2004 (2004-09-01), pages 954 - 960
ITO H: "Demonstration of ? amyloid protein- containing neurofibrillary tangles in parkinsonism-dementia complex on Guam", NEUROPATHOLOGY AND APPLIED NEUROBIOLOGY, vol. 17, no. 5, October 1991 (1991-10-01), pages 365 - 373
J. MASS SPECTRUM. SOC. JPN., vol. 51, no. 5, 2003, pages 492 - 498
J.K. STILLE, ANGEW. CHEM. INT. ED. ENGL., vol. 25, 1986, pages 508
J.P. COLLMAN ET AL., ORG. LETTERS, vol. 2, 2000, pages 1233 - 1236
JARRETT JT: "The carboxy terminus of the ? amyloid protein is critical for the seeding of amyloid formation: Implications for the pathogenesis of Alzheimer's disease", BIOCHEMISTRY, vol. 32, no. 18, 11 May 1993 (1993-05-11), pages 4693 - 4697
JARRETT JT: "The carboxy terminus of the ? amyloid PROTEIN is critical for the seeding of amyloid formation: Implications for the pathogenesis of Alzheimers' disease", BIOCHEMISTRY, vol. 32, no. 18, 1993, pages 4693 - 4697
JINLW: "Intracellular accumulation of amyloidogenic fragments of amyloid-? precursor protein in neurons with Niemann-Pick. type C defects is associated with endosomal abnormalities", AMERICAN JOURNAL OF PATHOLOGY, vol. 164, no. 3, March 2004 (2004-03-01), pages 975 - 985
K. SONOGASHIRA, COMPREHENSIVE ORGANIC SYNTHESIS, vol. 3, 1991, pages 521
KIRKITADZE MD: "Paradigm shifts in Alzheimer's disease and other neuradegenerative disorders: the emerging role ef oligomeric assemblies", JOURNAL OF NEUROSCIENCE RESEARCH, vol. 69, no. 5, 1 September 2002 (2002-09-01), pages 567 - 577
KLEIN WL: "Alzheimer's disease-affected brain: Presence of aligomeric A? ligands (ADDLs) suggests a molecular basis for reversible memory loss", PROCEEDING NATIONAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCE USA, vol. 100, no. 18, 2 September 2003 (2003-09-02), pages 10417 - 10422
KLEIN WL: "Alzheimer's disease-affected brain: Presence of oligorneric A? ligands (ADDLs) suggests a molecular basis for reversible memory loss", PROCEEDING OF THE NATIONAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCE USA, vol. 100, no. 18, 2 September 2003 (2003-09-02), pages 10417 - 10422
KOISTINAHO M: "?-amyloid precursor protein transgenic mice that harbor diffuse A? deposits but do not form plaques show increased ischemic vulnerability: Role of inflammation", PROCEEDING NATIONAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCE USA, vol. 99, no. 3, 5 February 2002 (2002-02-05), pages 1610 - 1615
LANZ TA: "Concentration-dependent modulation of amyloid-? in vivo and in vitro using the y-secretase inhibitor, LY-450139", THE JOURNAL OF PHARMACOLOGY AND EXPERIMANTAL THERAPEUTICS, vol. 9, no. 2, 1 December 2006 (2006-12-01), pages 924 - 933
LANZ TA: "Studies of A? pharmacodynamics in the brain, cerebrospinal fluid, and plasma in young (plaque-free) Tg2576 mice using the y-secretase inhibitor N2-[(2S)-2-(3,5-difluorophenyl)-2-hydroxyethanoyl]-N1-[(7S)-5-methyl-6-oxo-6,7-dihydro-5H-dibenzo[b,d]azepin-7-yl]-L-alaninamide(LY-411575)", THE JOURNAL OF PHARMACOLOGY AND EXPERIMENTAL THERAPEUTICS, vol. 9, no. 1, 30 April 2004 (2004-04-30), pages 49 - 55
LAWS SM: "Association between the presenilin-1 mutation Glu318Gly and complaints of memory impairment", NEUROBIOLOGY OF AGING, vol. 23, no. 1, January 2002 (2002-01-01), pages 55 - 58
LEVY E: "Mutation of the Alzheimer's disease amyloid gene in hereditary cerebral hemorrhage, Dutch type", SCIENCE, vol. 248, no. 4959, 1 June 1990 (1990-06-01), pages 1124 - 1126
LOWENSON JD: "Protein aging: Extracellular amyloid formation and intracellular repair", TRENDS IN CARDIOVASCULAR MEDICINE, vol. 4, no. 1, 1994, pages 3 - 8
MANN DM: "Deposition of amyloid (A4) protein within the brains of persons with dementing disorders other than Alzheimer's disease and Down's syndrome", NEUROSCIENCE LETTERS, vol. 109, no. 1-2, 5 February 1990 (1990-02-05), pages 68 - 75
MASLIAH E: "?-amyloid peptides enhance a-synuclein accumulation and neuronal deficits in a transgenic mouse model linking Alzheimer's disease and Parkinson's disease", PROCEEDING NATIONAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCE USA, vol. 98, no. 21, 9 October 2001 (2001-10-09), pages 12245 - 12250
MASTERS CL: "Amyloid plaque core protein in Alzheimer disease and Down syndrome", PROCEEDING NATIONAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCE USA, no. 12, pages 4245 - 4249
MASTERS CL: "Amyloid plaque core protein in Alzheimer disease and Down syndrome", PROCEEDING OF THE NATIONAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCE USA, vol. 2, no. 12, 8 June 1985 (1985-06-08), pages 4245 - 4249
MATSUBARA-TSUTSUI M: "Molecular evidence of presenilin 1 mutation in familial early onset dementia", AMERICAN JOURNAL OF MEDICAL GENETICS, vol. 114, no. 3, 8 April 2002 (2002-04-08), pages 292 - 298
MORAN PM: "Age-related learning deficits in transgenic mice expressing the 751-amino acid isoform of human p-amyloid precursor protein", PROCEEDING NATIONAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCE USA, vol. 92, no. 12, 6 June 1995 (1995-06-06), pages 5341 - 5345
MORGAN D: "A? peptide vaccination prevents memory loss in an animal model of Alzheimer's disease", NATURE, vol. 408, no. 6815, 21 December 2000 (2000-12-21), pages 982 - 985
NITSCH RM: "Antibodies against ?-amyloid slow cognitive decline in Alzheimer's disease", NEURON, vol. 38, 22 May 2003 (2003-05-22), pages 547 - 554
NITSCH RM: "Antibodies against 0-amyloid slow cognitive decline in Alzheimer's disease", NEURON, vol. 38, no. 4, 22 May 2003 (2003-05-22), pages 547 - 554
O'RIORDAN S: "Presenilin-1 mutation (E280G), spastic paraparesis, and cranial MRI white-matter abnormalities", NEUROLOGY, vol. 59, no. 7, 8 October 2002 (2002-10-08), pages 1108 - 1110
PRIMAVERA J: "Brain accumulation of amyioid-? in Non-Alzheimer Neurodegencration", JOURNAL OF ALZHEIMER'S DISEASE, vol. 1, no. 3, October 1999 (1999-10-01), pages 183 - 193
PRIMAVERA J: "Brain accumulation of amyloid-? in Non-Alzheimer Neurodegeneration", JOURNAL OF ALZHEIMER'S DISEASE, no. 3, 1 October 1999 (1999-10-01), pages 183 - 193
PRIMAVERA J: "Brain accumulation of amyloid-? in Non-Alzheimer Neurodegeneration", JOURNAL OF ALZHEIMER'S DISEASE, vol. 1, no. 3, October 1999 (1999-10-01), pages 183 - 193
R.F. HECK, ORG. REACTIONS, vol. 27, 1982, pages 345
REYNOLDS WF: "Myeloperoxidase polymorphism is associated with gender specific risk for Alzheimer's disease", EXPERIMENTAL NEUROLOGY, vol. 155, no. 1, January 1999 (1999-01-01), pages 31 - 41
ROSSO SM: "Annals of the New York academy of sciences", vol. 920, 2000, article "Coexistent tau andamyloid pathology in hereditary frontotemporal dementia with tau mutations", pages: 115 - 119
SADOWSKI M: "Links between the pathology of Alzheimer's disease and vascular dementia", NEUROCHEMICAL RESEARCH, vol. 29, no. 6, June 2004 (2004-06-01), pages 1257 - 1266
SASAKI S: "Immunoreactivity of ?-amyloid precursor protein in amyotrophic lateral sclerosis", ACTA NEUROPATHOLOGICA (BERL), vol. 97, no. 5, May 1999 (1999-05-01), pages 463 - 468
SCHEUNER D: "Secreted amyloid ?-protein similar to that in the senile plaques of Alzheimer's disease is increased in vivo by the presenilin I and 2 and APP mutations linked to familial Alzheimer's disease", NATURE MEDICINE, vol. 2, no. 8, August 1996 (1996-08-01), pages 864 - 870
SCHEUNER D: "Secreted amyloid p-protein similar to that in the senile plaques ofAlzheimer's disease is increased in vivo by the presenilin 1 and 2 and APP mutations linked to familial Alzheimer's disease", NATURE MEDICINE, no. 8, 2 August 1996 (1996-08-02), pages 864 - 870
SCHMIDT ML: "Amyloid plaques in Guam amyotrophic lateral sclerosis/ parkinsonism-dementia complex contain species of A? similar to those found in the amyloid plaques of Alzheimer's disease and pathological aging", ACTA NEUROPATHOLOGICA (BERL), vol. 95, no. 2, February 1998 (1998-02-01), pages 117 - 122
SHEARMAN MS: "Catalytic Site-Directed y-Secretase Complex Inhibitors Do Not Discriminate Pharmacologically between Notch S3 and ?-APP Clevages", BIOCHEMISTRY, vol. 42, no. 24, 24 June 2003 (2003-06-24), pages 7580 - 7586
SHEARMAN MS: "L-685, 458, an Aspartyl Protease Transition State Mimic, Is a Potent Inhibitor of Amyloid ?-Protein Precursor ?-Secretase Activity", BIOCHEMISTRY, vol. 39, no. 30, 1 August 2000 (2000-08-01), pages 8698 - 8704
SIEMERS ER: "Effects of a y-secretase inhibitor in a randamized study of patients with Alzheimer disease", NEUROLOGY, vol. 66, 2006, pages 602 - 604
SILVERBERG GD: "Alzheimer's disease, normal-pressure hydrocephalus, and senescent changes in CSF circulatory physiology: a hypothesis", LANCET NEUROLOGY, vol. 2, no. 8, August 2003 (2003-08-01), pages 506 - 511
SINGLETON AB: "Pathology of early-onset Alzheimer's disease cases bearing the Thr113-114ins presenilin-1 mutation", BRAIN, vol. 123, December 2000 (2000-12-01), pages 2467 - 2474
SMITH DH: "Protein accumulation in traumatic brain injury", NEUROMOLECULAR MEDICINE, vol. 4, no. 1-2, 2003, pages 59 - 72
SMITH MJ: "Variable phenotype of Alzheimer's disease with spastic paraparesis", ANNALS OF NEUROLOGY, vol. 49, no. 1, 2001, pages 125 - 129
T. GREENE ET AL.: "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis", 1981, JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC.
TAMAOKA A: "Increased amyloid ? protein in the skin of patients with amyotrophic lateral sclerosis", JOURNAL OF NEUROLOGY, vol. 247, no. 8, August 2000 (2000-08-01), pages 633 - 635
TELLER JK: "Presence of soluble amyloid ?-peptide precedes amyloid plaque formation in Down's syndrome", NATURE MEDICINE, no. 1, 2 January 1996 (1996-01-02), pages 93 - 95
TOKUDA T: "Plasma levels of amyloid ? proteins A?1-40 and A?1-42 (43) are elevated in Down's syndrome", ANNALS OF NEUROLOGY, vol. 1, no. 2, 4 February 1997 (1997-02-04), pages 271 - 273
TOLNAY M: "Low amyloid (A?) plaque load and relative predominance of diffuse. plaques distinguish argyrophilic grain disease from Alzheimer's disease", NEUROPATHOLOGY AND APPLIED NEUROBIOLOGY, vol. 25, no. 4, August 1999 (1999-08-01), pages 295 - 305
TURNER BJ: "Brain (?-amyloidaccumulation in transgenic mice expressing mutant superoxide dismutase 1", NEUROCHEMICAL RESEARCH, vol. 29, no. 12, December 2004 (2004-12-01), pages 2281 - 2286
VAN DUINEN SG: "Hereditary cerebral hemorrhage with amyloidosis in patients of Dutch origin is related to Alzheimer disease", PROCEEDING NATIONAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCE USA, vol. 84, no. 16, August 1987 (1987-08-01), pages 5991 - 5994
VAUCHER E: "Object recognition memory and cholinergic parameters in mice expressing human presenilin 1 transgenes", EXPERIMENTAL NEUROLOGY, vol. 175, no. 2, June 2002 (2002-06-01), pages 398 - 406
W. CARRUTTHERS: "Some modern methods of organic synthesis", 1986, CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS, pages: 120 - 121
WELLER RO: "Annals of the New York academy of sciences", vol. 977, November 2002, article "Cerebrovascular disease is a major factor in the failure of elimination of A? from the aging human brain", pages: 162 - 168
WELLER RO: "Cerebral amyloid angiopathy: Accumulation of A? in interstitial fluid drainage pathways in Alzheimer's disease", ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, vol. 903, April 2000 (2000-04-01), pages 110 - 117
WELLER RO: "Pathology of cerebrospinal fluid and interstitial fluid of the CNS: Significance for Alzheimer's disease, prion disorders and multiple sclerosis", JOURNAL OF NEUROPATHOLOGY AND EXPERIMENTAL NEUROLOGY, vol. 57, no. 10, October 1998 (1998-10-01), pages 885 - 894
WONG GT: "Chronic treatment with the y-secretase inhibitor LY-411, 575 inhibits ?-amyloid peptide production and alters lymphopoiesis and intestinal cell differentiation", THE JOURNAL OF BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY, vol. 279, no. 13, 26 March 2004 (2004-03-26), pages 12876 - 12882
YASUHARA O: "Accumulation of amyloid precursor protein in brain lesions of patients with Pick disease", NEUROSCIENCE LETTERS, vol. 171, no. 1-2, 25 April 1994 (1994-04-25), pages 63 - 66
YOW HY: "A role for cerebrovascular disease in determining the pattern of ?-amyloid deposition in Alzheimer's disease", NEUROLOGY AND APPLIED NEUROBIOLOGY, vol. 28, 2002, pages 149
ZHANG F: "Increased susceptibility to ischemic brain damage in transgenic mice overexpressing the amyloid precursor protein", THE JOURNAL OF NEUROSCIENCE, vol. 17, no. 20, 15 October 1997 (1997-10-15), pages 7655 - 7661

Cited By (58)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8884017B2 (en) 2001-12-27 2014-11-11 Bayer Intellectual Property Gmbh 2-heteroarylcarboxylic acid amides
US9453000B2 (en) 2007-08-31 2016-09-27 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Polycyclic compound
US8546440B2 (en) 2008-12-18 2013-10-01 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted bicyclic imidazole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
US8946426B2 (en) 2009-02-06 2015-02-03 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted bicyclic heterocyclic compounds as gamma secretase modulators
US8772504B2 (en) 2009-02-19 2014-07-08 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted benzoxazole, benzimidazole, oxazolopyridine and imidazopyridine derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
US8703954B2 (en) 2009-02-26 2014-04-22 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Salt of tetrahydrotriazolopyridine derivative and crystal thereof
US8754100B2 (en) 2009-02-26 2014-06-17 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Nitrogen-containing fused heterocyclic compounds and their use as beta amyloid production inhibitors
US8835482B2 (en) 2009-05-07 2014-09-16 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted indazole and aza-indazole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
US8946266B2 (en) 2009-07-15 2015-02-03 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted triazole and imidazole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
WO2011086098A1 (en) 2010-01-15 2011-07-21 Ortho-Mcneil-Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc Novel substituted bicyclic triazole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
US9079886B2 (en) 2010-01-15 2015-07-14 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted triazole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
US9145399B2 (en) 2010-01-15 2015-09-29 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted bicyclic triazole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
WO2011086099A1 (en) 2010-01-15 2011-07-21 Ortho-Mcneil-Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc Novel substituted triazole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
US9108961B2 (en) 2010-05-17 2015-08-18 Forum Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Crystalline form of (R)-7-chloro-N-(quinuclidin-3-yl)benzo[b]thiophene-2-carboxamide hydrochloride
US9550767B2 (en) 2010-05-17 2017-01-24 Forum Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Crystalline form of (R)-7-chloro-N-(quinuclidin-3-yl)benzo[b]thiophene-2-carboxamide hydrochloride monohydrate
US9273044B2 (en) 2010-05-17 2016-03-01 Forum Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Crystalline form of (R)-7-chloro-N-(quinuclidin-3-yl)benzo[b]thiophene-2-carboxamide hydrochloride monohydrate
US9150591B2 (en) 2010-08-10 2015-10-06 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Heterocyclic compound and use thereof
US10654874B2 (en) 2010-08-10 2020-05-19 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Heterocyclic compound and use thereof
US9499568B2 (en) 2010-08-10 2016-11-22 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Heterocyclic compound and use thereof
US9884875B2 (en) 2010-08-10 2018-02-06 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Heterocyclic compound and use thereof
US11279713B2 (en) 2010-08-10 2022-03-22 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Heterocyclic compound and use thereof
US8822699B2 (en) 2010-09-02 2014-09-02 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Heterocyclic compound and use thereof
WO2012029991A1 (en) * 2010-09-02 2012-03-08 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Fused triazoles for the treatment or prophylaxis of mild cognitive impairment
US8901309B2 (en) 2010-09-02 2014-12-02 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Fused triazoles for the treatment or prophylaxis of mild cognitive impairment
US8987276B2 (en) 2011-03-24 2015-03-24 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted triazolyl piperazine and triazolyl piperidine derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
WO2012126984A1 (en) 2011-03-24 2012-09-27 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Novel substituted triazolyl piperazine and triazolyl piperidine derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
US9067934B2 (en) 2011-03-31 2015-06-30 Pfizer Inc. Bicyclic pyridinones
US8697673B2 (en) 2011-03-31 2014-04-15 Pfizer Inc. Bicyclic pyridinones
US9115143B2 (en) 2011-07-15 2015-08-25 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted indole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
WO2013010904A1 (en) 2011-07-15 2013-01-24 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Novel substituted indole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
CN103874702B (en) * 2011-07-15 2015-12-09 杨森制药公司 As the indole derivatives be substituted of gamma secretase modulators
CN103874702A (en) * 2011-07-15 2014-06-18 杨森制药公司 Novel substituted indole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
EA023045B1 (en) * 2011-07-15 2016-04-29 Янссен Фармасьютикалз, Инк. Novel substituted indole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
JP2014518286A (en) * 2011-07-15 2014-07-28 ヤンセン ファーマシューティカルズ,インコーポレーテッド Novel substituted indole derivatives as .gamma.-secretase modulators
KR101913135B1 (en) 2011-07-15 2018-10-30 얀센 파마슈티칼즈, 인코포레이티드 Novel substituted indole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
AU2012285931B2 (en) * 2011-07-15 2017-01-12 Cellzome Limited Novel substituted indole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
US9585877B2 (en) 2012-05-08 2017-03-07 Forum Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of maintaining, treating or improving cognitive function
US9181245B2 (en) 2012-05-16 2015-11-10 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted pyrido[1,2-a]pyrazines and substituted pyrido[1,2-a][1,4]diazepines for the treatment of (inter alia) Alzheimer's disease
EP2687528A1 (en) * 2012-07-17 2014-01-22 Ares Trading S.A. Fused triazole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
WO2014012614A1 (en) * 2012-07-17 2014-01-23 Ares Trading S.A. Fused triazole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
US9527853B2 (en) 2012-07-17 2016-12-27 Ares Trading S.A. Fused triazole derivatives as gamma secretase modulators
US8916564B2 (en) 2012-09-21 2014-12-23 Pfizer Inc. Substituted pyrido[1,2-a]pyrazines for the treatment of neurodegenerative and neurological disorders
US9751877B2 (en) 2012-09-21 2017-09-05 Pfizer Inc. Substituted pyrido[1,2-a]pyrazines for the treatment of neurodegenerative and neurological disorders
US9193726B2 (en) 2012-09-21 2015-11-24 Pfizer Inc. Substituted pyrido[1,2-a]pyrazines for the treatment of neurodegenerative and neurological disorders
US10112943B2 (en) 2012-12-20 2018-10-30 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Substituted imidazoles as gamma secretase modulators
US10246454B2 (en) 2013-01-17 2019-04-02 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Substituted 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[1,2-a]pyrazine-1,6-diones as gamma secretase modulators
US10562897B2 (en) 2014-01-16 2020-02-18 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Substituted 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[1,2-a]pyrazine-1,6-diones as gamma secretase modulators
US9765073B2 (en) 2015-02-03 2017-09-19 Pfizer Inc. Cyclopropabenzofuranyl pyridopyrazinediones
CN107118173B (en) * 2017-07-12 2019-10-29 阿里生物新材料(常州)有限公司 A kind of cycloheptatriene and oxazine compound and preparation method thereof
CN107118173A (en) * 2017-07-12 2017-09-01 阿里化学(常州)有限公司 A kind of cycloheptatriene Bing oxazine compounds and preparation method thereof
US12357639B2 (en) 2017-09-22 2025-07-15 Jubilant Epipad LLC Heterocyclic compounds as pad inhibitors
US11833156B2 (en) 2017-09-22 2023-12-05 Jubilant Epipad LLC Heterocyclic compounds as pad inhibitors
US11673892B2 (en) 2017-10-11 2023-06-13 Genentech, Inc. Bicyclic compounds for use as RIP1 kinase inhibitors
US11426412B2 (en) 2017-10-18 2022-08-30 Jubilant Epipad LLC Imidazo-pyridine compounds as PAD inhibitors
US11629135B2 (en) 2017-11-06 2023-04-18 Jubilant Prodell Llc Pyrimidine derivatives as inhibitors of PD1/PD-L1 activation
US11459338B2 (en) 2017-11-24 2022-10-04 Jubilant Episcribe Llc Heterocyclic compounds as PRMT5 inhibitors
US11529341B2 (en) 2018-03-13 2022-12-20 Jubilant Prodel LLC Bicyclic compounds as inhibitors of PD1/PD-L1 interaction/activation
US12370192B2 (en) 2019-09-16 2025-07-29 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Azole-fused pyridazin-3(2H)-one derivatives

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AR075605A1 (en) 2011-04-20
TW201031662A (en) 2010-09-01
JP2012051806A (en) 2012-03-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2559693B1 (en) Polycyclic compound
WO2010098495A1 (en) Imidazolylpyrazine derivatives
EP2401276B1 (en) Nitrogen-containing fused heterocyclic compounds and their use as beta amyloid production inhibitors
WO2010098488A1 (en) Aryl imidazole compounds and their use as beta amyloid production inhibitors
US7935815B2 (en) Imidazoyl pyridine compounds and salts thereof
EP1992618B1 (en) Polycyclic cinnamide derivative
ES2377740T3 (en) Polycyclic Cinnamide Derivatives
EP2019094A1 (en) Heterocyclic type cinnamide derivative
HK1165954B (en) Nitrogen-containing fused heterocyclic compounds and their use as beta amyloid production inhibitors
HK1122027B (en) Polycyclic cinnamide derivative

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 10708827

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 10708827

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1